.'PLIED MINOR TACTICS 

Ltdir Map Problems and theWarGame) 

Map R eading 
Map Sketching 




PRESENTED BY 



APPLIED MINOR 
TACTICS 

{Including Map Problems and the War Game) 

Map Reading and Map 
Sketching 



SIMPLIFIED FOR BEGINNERS 



Especially Adapted to the Instruction of Noncom- 
missioned Officers 'and Privates in their 
Duties in Campaign 



By Capt. Jas. A. Moss 

24th U. S. Infantry 



PRINTED MARCH, 1912 



SALES AGENTS 
THE U. S. INFANTRY ASSOCIATION, Washington, D. C 

THE U. S. CAVALRY ASSOCIATION, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas 

THE POST EXCHANGE, Fort Wm. McKinley, P. I. 



PRICE $1.50, POSTPAID 



v^ 

*> 



Copyright 1912 by Jas. A. Moss 
Gift 



\2 JUL !9!2 



National Capital Press, Inc. 
washington, d. c. 



Acknowledgment 



The author wishes to acknowledge the 
material assistance received from Lieuten- 
ant George C. Marshall, U. S. Army, in the 
preparation of this book. 



vu 



INDEX 



E 



Advance cavalry 85 and 118 

Advance guard — 

Advance cavalry 85 

Advance party 85 

Composition i_83 

Connecting files 84 

Definition and duties 83 

Distance from main body 84 

Flank guards 113 

Formation of 85 

Order 89 

Point 86 

Problems 91, 96, 101, 104, 

105, 107, 109, 110, 111, 112 

Reconnaissance 89 

Reserve 88 

Strength 83 

Subdivisions of 85 

Support 85 and 88 

Advance party 85 

Applied minor tactics 30 

B 

Bridges — 

Demolition of (Par. 79) 61 

Facts regarding 59 

How reconnoitered 57 

C 

Camps, abandoned 55 

Camp noises 55 

Canals, pacts regarding 60 

Cavalry outpost 126 

Combat patrols 121 

Compass 21 

Connecting piles 84 

Contours 5 and 17 

Conventional signs 10, 24 and 173 

D 

Decision, the 33 

Defiles — 

Facts regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 57 

Demolitions 60 

Deserters 89 

Detached posts 124 

Direction on maps 4 and 20 



Enclosures, how reconnoitered 57 

Estimating the situation 32 

Examining posts 125 

F 

Flags of truce 89 

Flank guards 113 

Fords, how reconnoitered 57 

H 

Heights — 

Facts, regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 57 

Houses, how reconnoitered 58 

I 

Information, service of 42 

Instruction in map problems 36 

L 

I^ine of observation 118 and 119 

Line of resistance 118 

M 

Maneuvers 32 

Map distances 9 and 18 

Map making 165 

Map maneuvers. See "War Game." 
Map problems, general plan of in- 
struction in 36 

Map reading 1 

Marshes, facts regarding 60 

Meridians 4, 20 and 23 

Message — 

General principles 48 and 52 

Models 51 

Military sketching. See "Sketch- 
ing." 

Minor tactics 30 

Mission 32 

Model reports of patrol leaders 61 

N 

Noises, camp 55 

o 

Observation groups 119 

Order for — 

Advance guard 89 

Outpost 127 

Rear guard 114 

Orders of sentinels on outpost 124 



via 



INDEX 



Orientation 22 

Outguards 119 and 122 

Outposts — 

Advance cavalry 118 

Cavalry outpost 126 

Changes for the night 128 

Communication between subdi- 
visions 128 

Definition and duties 116 

Detached posts 124 

Details for patrols 121 

Distance from camp of main 

body 117 

Establishing the outpost 127 

Examining posts 125 

Formation of 118 

Eine of observation 118 and 119 

Line of resistance 118 

Observation groups 119 

Order 127 

Outguards 119 and 122 

Problems 129, 131, 134 

Relieving the outpost 128 

Reserve 125 

Sentinels 123 and 124 

Strength 116 

Subdivisions 118 

Supports 119 

P 

Patrolling — 

Abandoned camps 55 

Bridges — 

Facts regarding 59 

How reconnoitered 57 

Camp noises 55 

Canals 60 

Combat patrols 121 

Cross roads 57 

Defiles — 

Facts regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 57 

Demolition 60 

Enclosures 57 

Flames and smoke 56 

Fords 57 

Formation of patrols 45 

General principles 45 

Heights — ■ 

Facts regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 57 



Houses 58 

Inspection of patrols before de- 
parture 44 

Marshes, facts regarding 60 

Messages — 

General principles 48 and 52 

Models 51 

Night work 40 

Orders for a patrol 43 

Outpost patrols 121 

Patrols — 

Definition 42 

Size 42 

Patrol leaders 42 

Ponds, facts regarding 60 

Preparation of a patrol for de- 
parture 44 

Prisoners 55 

Problems 63, 69, 75 

Railroads — 

Demolition of 61 

Facts regarding 59 

Rate of march of patrols 47 

Reconnaissance 89 

Reconnaissance of various ob- 
jects 57 

Reconnoitering patrols 121 

Reports of patrol leaders, models 

of 61 

Report on return of patrols 61 

Rivers 59 

Roads — 

Demolition of 61 

Facts regarding 59 

Scattered patrols 47 

Signals 48 

Springs, facts regarding 60 

Suggestions for gaining informa- 
tion about the enemy 53 

Telegraphs — 

Demolition of 60 

Facts regarding 60 

Valleys, facts regarding 60 

Villages — 

Facts regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 58 

Woods — 

Facts regarding 59 

How reconnoitered 57 

Point of advance guard 86 



INDEX 



IX 



Positions, how reconnoitered 57 

Ponds, facts regarding 60 

Prisoners 55 

Problems — 

Advance guard _J — 91, 96, 101 
104, 105, 107, 109, 112 

Outpost 129, 131, 134 

Patrol 63, 69, 75 

R 

Railroads — 

Demolition 61 

Facts regarding 59 

Rear guard — 

Action of 115 

Definition and duties 114 

Distance from main body 115 

Order 114 

Rate of march 115 

Strength 114 

Reconnaissance 89 

Reconnaissance of various objects- 57 

Reconnoitering patrols 121 

Report on return of patrols 61 

Reports of patrol leaders, models- 61 

Representative fraction (Par. 22) 13 

Reserves in general 82 

Reserve of advance guard 88 

Reserve of outpost 125 

Rivers, facts regarding 59 

Roads — 

Demolition of 61 

Facts regarding 59 

s 

Scales — 

Advanced explanation of 13 

Construction of 14 

Elementary explantion of 2 

Methods of representing 13 

Problems in 16 

Scaling distances 16 

War game 139 

Sentinels on outpost 123 and 124 

Service of — 

Information 42 

Security 82 

Signals 48 

Sketching — 

Clinometer 169 

Conventional signs 173 



Drawing board 168 

Points for beginners to remem- 
ber 175 

Position sketching 170 

Road sketching 171 

Sketching case 167 

Tally Register 169 

Slopes, how expressed 19 

Springs, facts regarding 60 

Support — 

Advance guard 85 and 88 

In general 82 

Outposts 119 

T 

Telegraphs — 

Demolition of 60 

Facts regarding 60 

Terrain exercises 31 

V 

Valleys, facts regarding 60 

Villages — 

Facts regarding 60 

How reconnoitered 58 

Visibility 25 

Vision, limits of 56 

W 

War Game— 

Calculations and notes 142 

Decisions 141 

Director 141 

Equipment 138 

Example of conducting a war 

game 149 

General remarks 136 

Instruction for beginners 144 

Map maneuver set 139 

Maps 138 

One-sided map maneuver 146 

Outline of procedure _136 

Preparation for problem 141 

Rooms 140 

Scales 139 

Situations for map maneuvers 162 

Table 138 

Troop signs 139 

Two-sided map maneuver 148 

Woods — 

Facts regarding 59 

How reconnoitered 57 



CHAPTER I. 

MAP READING. 

INTRODUCTION. 

1. This chapter on map reading presents two phases of the subject. In 
order that the beginner may grasp the rudimentary principles without diffi- 
culty, the subject is first considered in the most elementary manner, and 
later, for the benefit of the student who has already acquired a slight 
knowledge of the subject, the same ground is covered in a less elementary 
way. 

For some unknown reason, military map reading has always been con- 
sidered a very difficult subject to master, and the beginner, starting out 
with this idea, tries to find it difficult. Therefore, it is not strange that he 
finds the subject hard to understand and laborious to study. As a matter 
of fact, it is far easier to learn to read a map than it is to learn to patrol, 
write messages, give proper orders, etc. 

The most ignorant tourist easily uses the complicated maps in the guide 
books to find his way about; men, women and children, riding in auto- 
mobiles, use the road maps of the country without a thought of having 
acquired the knowledge of some difficult art; but as soon as the military 
student considers map reading, he decides he has a most difficult subject 
to master, and he proceeds, unconsciously, to make it difficult. 

PART I. 

2. A military map is a drawing, made to represent some section of 
country, showing the things that are of military importance, such as roads, 
streams, bridges, houses, and hills. The map must be so drawn that you 
can tell the distance between any two points, the heights of hills, and the 
relative positions of everything shown. 

Map Reading. 

8. By map reading is meant the ability to get a clear idea of the 
ground represented by the map with the same ease one reads a book or 
newspaper. This means to grasp at once the distance on the ground cor- 



2 CHAPTER I. 

responding to a given distance on the map, to get a correct idea of the 
network of streams and roads, heights, slopes, depressions, and all forms 
of military cover and obstacles. The first thing necessary in map read- 
ing, therefore, is to have a thorough knowledge of the scale of maps. 

The Scale of a Map. 

4. In order that you may be able to tell the distance between any two 
points, for instance, between Salem and Boling on the Elementary Map 
(in back of book), the map must be so drawn that a certain distance, say 
one inch, on the map always represents a certain distance on the ground, 
say one mile. 

Suppose Boling is 5 miles from Salem, and 1 inch on the map is to 
represent 1 mile on the ground; then on the map Boling would be shown 

5 inches from Salem, and any person knowing the scale of that map (1 
inch = l mile), could at once determine the distance from Salem to 
Boling. He would measure the number of inches between the two towns 
and know that the actual distance on the ground was as many miles as 
he had measured inches. Suppose, for example, he found it was 3}/ 2 
inches to Boling; then he would know that the two places were 3]4 miles 
apart. 

Another example, suppose the scale of your map reads 6 inches = 1 
mile and you wish to know the distance you have to march from a farm 
to a certain crossroads. You measure the distance between these two 
points on the map and find it to be 9 inches. You at once know that the 
actual distance, ground distance, is l l / 2 miles. For, if 6 inches on the map 
equals 1 mile on the ground, 9 inches must equal V/ 2 miles — just as 12 
inches would equal 2 miles, and 24 inches would represent 4 miles on the 
ground. 

5. Instead of writing the scale on the map thus, 6 inches = i mile or 

6 inches to the mile (which means the same thing), you may find the 
scale represented by a long line or pair of lines divided into numbered 
lengths. Thus : 

I I I I I 1 ! 1 1 \ 1 

100 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 yards 

Figure 1. 

In fact, this is even a simpler method of indicating the scale of a map. 
You do not have to convert measurements of inches into miles, yards, 
feet, or whatever inches on the map represent on the ground. No ruler 



MAP READING. 3 

of inches is necessary. From the on the scale shown in Figure 1 to the 
600, is 600 yards. This means that this length on the map represents 600 
yards on the ground, and as the scale has 7 subdivisions of 100 yards each, 
and one of these again subdivided into four parts of 25 yards each, you 
can quickly find out the ground distance between points on the map. 

6. It must be noted here that each subdivision of the scale is marked, 
not with its actual length, but with the distance which it represents on the 
ground. This is ordinarily known as a graphical scale, and is the most 
frequent method of indicating the scale of a map. 

Example. If you wish to determine the distance from A to B, along 
the road shown in Figure 2, 



Al 



Ml 



i I I i i 



too 50 o 100 200 300 too -Too eooyarda 

Figure 2. 

take a piece of paper and lay its edge along the road; mark the edge op- 
posite A and opposite B ; lay the edge of the paper along the scale (shown 
in Figure 2), and it shows the distance to be 675 yards. When you have 
to determine several distances from the map, it is more convenient first 
to lay the edge of the paper along the scale and mark off divisions like 
those of the scale. You then have a copy of the scale which you can 
quickly apply to any portion of the map and read off the ground dis- 
tances instantly. This has supposedly been done in Figure 2, where a 
rough copy of the actual scale is shown applied to the road between 
A and B. 

Example. Along the lower border of the Elementary Map is a graph- 
ical scale of miles and a second graphical scale, reading in yards,. How 
far is it from York to Oxford by the most direct road (Valley Pike) ? 
Take a piece of paper and lay its edge along the scale of miles; mark off 
similar divisions on the edge of the paper. This gives you a length of 
1 mile. Apply this along the Valley Pike, starting at York. You will 
find the distance is 4 times the length of the paper and about */> mile 
over. Therefore, as the scale length you used represents 1 mile, the dis- 
tance is 4^2 miles. If you desired to know the distance in yards from 
York to the Cemetery on the County Road, you would repeat the same 
process, taking your distances from the graphical scale reading yards, 
and you would find the distance to be 750 yards. 



4 CHAPTER I. 

Using the scale of miles, you can find the distance from York to Salem 
by road (3 miles), from Salem to Boling by road (4 miles), and so on. 

7. The distances between points on a map represent corresponding 
ground distances measured on the level {horizontal distances). For ex- 
ample, the distance from York to Boling that you would walk would in- 
clude the extra distance required in ascending and descending the hill 
and valley between these two points. The distance on the map, however, 
represents the distance between the towns, measured as though the in- 
tervening ground were absolutely level. 

8. Direction. In order that the map may correctly show the positions 
of the different roads, streams, hills, houses, etc., with respect to one an- 
other, they must be given the same relative locations on the map that they 
occupy on the ground. The map must also show the points of the compass. 

9. Meridians. If you look along the upper left hand border of the 
Elementary Map you will see two arrows pointing towards the top of the 
map, thus: 



They are pointing in the direction that is north on this map. The 



MAP READING. 5 

arrow with a full barb points toward the north pole of the earth. The 
arrow with but half a barb points toward what is known as the magnetic 
pole of the earth. This magnetic pole is a point up in the arctic regions 
near the geographical or true north pole, which, on account of its mag- 
netic qualities, attracts one end of all compass needles and causes them to 
point towards it. As it is near the true north pole, this serves to indicate 
the north direction to a person using a compass. The arrow with the full 
barb is called the true meridian, as it points to the true north pole. The 
arrow with the half barb is called the magnetic meridian as it points, not 
accurately towards the true north pole, but towards the magnetic pole. 
When you are using a compass, the needle points toward the magnetic 
pole, which is close enough to the true north for your purposes. 

You now know from the meridians that in going from York to Oxford 
you travel north; from Boling to Salem you must travel south; going 
from Salem to York requires you to travel west; and from York to Salem 
you travel east. Suppose you are in command of a patrol at York and are 
told to go to Salem by the most direct line across country. You look at 
your map and see that Salem is exactly east of York. Next you take out 
your field compass (Figure 16, page 21), raise the lid, hold the box level, 
allow the needle to settle and see in what direction the north end of the 
needle points (it would point towards Oxford). You then know the direc- 
tion of north from York and you can turn to your right and go due east 
towards Salem. 

Having once discovered the direction of north on the ground, you can 
go to any point shown on your map without other assistance. If you 
stand at York, facing north and refer to your map, you need no guide 
to tell you that Salem lies directly to your right; Oxford straight in front 
of you ; Boling in a direction about halfway between the directions of 
Salem and Oxford, and so on. 

10. Contours. So far we have only dealt with the methods of repre- 
senting the horizontal (level) distances between points, and the direc- 
tions with regard to the different points of the compass (north, south, 
east and west). In order to show on a map a correct representation of 
ground, the differences in elevation (vertical distances) of the terrain 
(ground) — the hills, valleys, ravines and flat land — must be indicated. 
This is usually done by means of contours. 

11. A contour is a line on a map which shows the route one might fol- 
low on the ground and walk on the absolute level. If you went half way 



6 CHAPTER I. 

up the side of a hill and, starting there, walked entirely around the hill, 
neither going up any higher nor down any lower, and you made a sketch 
of the route you had followed, the line representing your path around the 
hill would be, in effect, a contour. By means of these contour lines at 
different vertical (up and down) elevations, the hills, valleys, etc., can be 
graphically shown on a map. 

For example, on the Elementary Map, Sandy Ridge and Long Ridge 
are two isolated hills : Suppose this country were flooded with water 20 
feet above the lowest point (Sandy Creek), the lines (contours) around 
Sandy Ridge and Long Ridge marked 20 would then mark the edge of the 
water (water line) around the lower slopes of these hills. The "20" 
means that the contours so marked show the lines of the same elevation 
on the ground that are just 20 feet vertically above the lowest point in 
the section of country shown by this map. Now suppose the water rose 
20 feet more, that is, to a height of 40 feet. Then the contours marked 
40 would indicate the water line around these hills — all the ground to- 
wards the 20-foot contour and below would be inundated. If the water 
rose to 60 feet, then all of Long Ridge would be under water, but the two 
small knolls on Sandy Ridge outlined by the 60-foot contour, would still 
be out of water, as their crests are shown to be slightly higher (66, 68 
and 65). Contours are taken at a fixed vertical distance apart. In this 
case it is 20 feet. 

12. An excellent idea of what is meant by contours and contour-lines 
can be gotten from Figures 4 and 5. Let us suppose that formerly the 
island represented in Figure 4 was entirely under water and that by a 
sudden disturbance the water of the lake fell until the island stood 20 
feet above the water, and that later several other sudden falls of the water, 
20 feet each time, occurred, until now the island stands 100 feet out of 
the lake, and at each of the 20 feet elevations a distinct water line is left. 
These water lines are perfect contour-lines measured from the surface of 
the lake as a reference (or datum) plane. Figure 5 shows the contour- 
lines in Figure 4 projected, or shot down, on a horizontal (level) surface. 
It will be observed that on the gentle slopes, such as F-H (Fig. 4), the 
contours (20, 40) are far apart. But on the steep slopes, as R-O, the con- 
tours (20, 40, 60, 80, 100), are close together. Hence, it is seen that con- 
tours far apart on a map indicate gentle slopes, and contours close to- 
gether, steep slopes. It is also seen that the shape of the contours gives 
an accurate idea of the form of the island. The contours in Fig. 5 give 
an exact representation not only of the general form of the island, the 



MAP READING. 

Figure 4. 




Figure 5. 

two peaks, O and B, the stream, M-N, the Saddle, M, the water shed 
from F to H, and steep bluff at K, but they also give the slopes of the 
ground at all points. From this we see that the slopes are directly por- 
tional to the nearness of the contours — that is, the nearer the contours on 
a map are to one another, the steeper is the slope, and the farther the 
contours On a map are from one another, the gentler is the slope. A 
wide space between contours, therefore, represents level ground. 

13. The contours of a cone (Figure 6) are circles of different sizes, one 
within another, and the same distance apart, because the slope of a cone 
is at all points the same. 



CHAPTER I. 




Figure 6. 



Figure 7. 



Figure 8. 



The contours of a half sphere (Figure 7), are a series of circles, far 
apart near the center (top), and near together at the outside (bottom), 
showing that the slope of a hemisphere varies at all points, being nearly 
flat on top and increasing in steepness toward the bottom. 

The contours of a concave (hollowed out) cone (Figure 8) are close 
together at the center (top) and far apart at the outside (bottom). 

14. The following additional points about contours should be remem- 
bered: 

(a) A Water Shed or Spur, along which rain water divides, flowing 
away from it on both sides, is indicated by the higher contours bulging 
out toward the lower ones (F-H, Fig. 5, page 7). 

(b) A Water Course or Valley, along which rain falling on both sides 
of it joins in one stream, is indicated by the lower contours curving in 
toward the higher ones (M-N, Fig. 5). 

(c) The contours of different heights which unite and become a single 
line, represent a vertical cliff. (K, Fig. 5.) 

(d) Two contours which cross each other represent an overhanging 
cliff. 

(e) A closed contour without another contour in it, represents either 



MAP READING. 9 

a hilltop (figure cone) or a depression (a volcano) depending on whether 
its reference number is greater or smaller than that of the outer contour. 
A hilltop is shown when the closed contour is higher than the contour 
next to it; a depression is shown when the closed contour is lower than 
the one next to it. 

15. If the student will first examine the drainage system, as shown by 
the courses of the streams on the map, he can readily locate all the valleys, 
as the streams must flow through valleys. Knowing the valleys, the 
ridges or hills can easily be placed, even without reference to the numbers 
on the contours. 

For example: On the Elementary Map, Woods Creek flows north and 
York Creek flows south. They rise very close to each other, and the 
ground between the points at which they rise must be higher ground, 
sloping north on one side and south on the other, as the streams flow 
north and south, respectively, see the ridge running west from Twin Hills. 

The course of Sandy Creek indicates a long valley, extending almost 
the entire length of the map. Meadow Creek follows another valley, and 
Deep Run another. When these streams happen to join other streams, the 
valleys must open into each other. 

16. Scale of Map Distances. On the Elementary Map, below the scale 
of miles and scale of yards, is a scale similar to the following one : 

M.D. 

Figure 9. 

The left-hand division is marked l A° ; the next division (one-half as 
long) 1° ; the next division (one-half the length of the 1° division) 2°, and 
so on. The l / 2 division means that where adjacent contours on the map 
are just that distance apart, the ground has a slope of l / 2 a degree between 
these two contours, and slopes up towards the contour with the higher 
reference number; a space between adjacent contours equal to the 1° 
space shown on the scale means a 1° slope, and so on. 

What is a slope of 1°? By a slope of 1° we mean that the surface of 
the ground makes an angle of 1° with the horizontal (a level surface. See 
Figure 14, page 19). The student should find out the slope of some hill 
or street and thus get a concrete idea of what the different degrees of 
slope mean. A road having a 5° slope is very steep. 

By means of this scale of M. D.'s on the map, the map reader can de- 
termine the slope of any portion of the ground represented, that is, as 



10 CHAPTER I. 

steep as l /2° or steeper. Ground having a slope of less than 14° is prac- 
tically level. 

17. Conventional Signs. In order that the person using a map may be 
able to tell what are roads, houses, woods, etc., each of these features are 
represented by particular signs, called conventional signs. On the Elemen- 
tary Map the conventional signs are all labeled with the name of what 
they represent. By examining this map the student can quickly learn to 
distinguish the conventional signs of most of the ordinary features shown 
on maps. These conventional signs are usually graphical representations 
of the ground features they represent, and, therefore, can usually be recog- 
nized without explanation. 

For example, the roads on the Elementary Map can be easily distin- 
guished. They are represented by parallel lines ( =) . The student 
should be able to trace out the route of the Valley Pike, the Chester Pike, 
the County road, and the direct road from Salem to Boling. 

Private or farm lanes, and unimproved roads are represented by broken 
lines (= = = =). Such a road or lane can be seen running from the 
Barton farm to the Chester Pike. Another lane runs from the Mills farm 
to the same Pike. The small crossmarks on the road lines indicate barbed 
wire fences; the round circles indicate smooth wire ; the small, connected 
ovals (as shown around the cemetery) indicate stone walls; and the zig- 
zag lines (as shown one mile south of Boling) represent wooden fences. 

Near the center of the map, by the Chester Pike, is an orchard. The 
small circles, regularly placed, give the idea of trees planted in regular 
rows. Each circle does not indicate a tree, but the area covered by the 
small circles does indicate accurately the area covered by the orchard on 
the ground. 

Just southwest of Boling a large woods (Boling Woods) is shown. 
Other clumps of woods, of varying extent, are indicated on the map. 

The course of Sandy Creek can be readily traced, and the arrows placed 
along it, indicate the direction in which it flows. Its steep banks are in- 
dicated by successive dashes, termed hachures. A few 'trees are shown 
strung along its banks. Baker's Pond receives its water from the little 
creek which rises in the small clump of timber just south of the pond, and 
the hachures along the northern end represent the steep banks of a dam. 
Meadow Creek flows northeast from the dam and then northwest towards 
Oxford, joining Woods Creek just south of that town. York Creek rises 
in the woods V/\ miles north of York, and flows south through York. It 
has a west branch which rises in the valleys south of Twin Hills. 



MAP READING. 11 

A railroad is shown running southeast from Oxford to Salem. The 
hachures, unconnected at their outer extremities, indicate the fills or em- 
bankments over which the track runs. Notice the fills or embankments 
on which the railroad runs just northwest of Salem; near the crossing of 
Sandy Creek; north of Baker's Pond; and where it approaches the out- 
skirts of Oxford. The hachures, connected along their outer extremities, 
represent the cut through which the railroad passes. There is only one 
railroad cut shown on the Elementary Map — about one-quarter of a mile 
northeast of Baker's Pond — where it cuts through the northern extremity 
of the long range of hills, starting just east of York. The wagon roads 
pass through numerous cuts — west of Twin Hills, northern end of Sandy 
Ridge, southeastern end of Long Ridge, and so on. The small T's along 
the railroad and some of the wagon roads, indicate telegraph or telephone 
lines. 

The conventional sign for a bridge is shown where the railroad crosses 
Sandy Creek on a trestle. Other bridges are shown at the points the 
wagon roads cross this creek. Houses or buildings are shown in Oxford, 
Salem, York and Boling. They are also shown in the case of a number 
of farms represented — Barton farm, Wells farm, Mason's, Brown's, 
Baker's and others. The houses shown in solid black are substantial struc- 
tures of brick or stone; the buildings indicated by rectangular outlines are 
"out buildings," barns, sheds, etc. 

18. Example of Method followed in Beading a Map. Suppose you are 
out in the field in a campaign and are ordered to march to the section of 
country represented by the Elementary Map and take military control of 
it. You are given a copy of this map to study over the situation and fa- 
miliarize yourself with the country. How would you go about reading this 
map ? 

You would first look at the scale at the bottom of the map and see about 
how much distance on the map represented a mile on the ground. Then 
you would look for the meridian and see which direction was north. 

Oxford, Boling, Salem and York are the only towns or villages — all 
small. Oxford is about four miles due north of York and about two and 
one-half miles west of Boling, and Boling is about four miles north of 
Salem. A direct road connects Salem and Boling. The Chester Pike runs 
northwest out of Salem, and then due north, furnishing, with the cross- 



12 CHAPTER I. 

roads, means of communication between Oxford and Boling, Oxford and 
Salem, York and Boling, and York and Salem. A railroad passes through 
Oxford and Salem. 

There are numerous streams in the country, but Sandy Creek, 5 feet 
deep and 60 feet wide, is the only one of any size. It passes about half- 
way between Salem and York, flows north for about three miles, turns 
east, and disappears off the map about a mile south of Boling. The course 
of this creek and the smaller ones, mark the valleys in the district. Baker's 
Pond, two miles southeast of Oxford, is the only large body of water. 

There are several prominent hills or ridges. Just east of York a range 
of hills commences, and runs north about three miles, with several east 
and west spurs. It reaches a height of 80 feet in several places, and com- 
pletely commands the Chester and Valley Pikes and the valley through 
which Sandy Creek flows. East of Sandy Creek and nearly a mile north- 
west of Salem, is a long, "hog-backed" hill (Sandy Ridge), a little over 
a mile long, rising 60 feet out of the valley, and running north and south. 
From its crest an extensive view of the valley through which Sandy 
Creek, the Chester Pike and the railroad run can be obtained. Between 
Oxford and Boling is a similar hill (Long Ridge) about 40 feet high. 
About two-thirds of the way between Salem and Boling, the western ex- 
tremity of a high ridge is shown, with Bald Knob rising to a height of 
100 feet above the surrounding low ground. It is the highest point shown 
on the map. A quarry has been cut into its southern face, to which a 
switch runs from the railroad. There are several small knolls, notably 
the one between Bald Knob and Salem. 

The country is dotted with farms and orchards, but is lightly timbered, 
except for the extensive Boling Woods. Some of the roads and lanes 
are bordered by lines of trees, and the majority of the fences along the 
roads are of barbed or smooth wire. Telegraph or telephone lines fol- 
low the railroad and the principal highways. There are a few stone walls 
and two swamps. 

Three highway bridges span Sandy Creek, one stone, one steel and one 
of wood. The railroad crosses this creek on a steel trestle about 200 
yards long; the track approaching each end of the trestle on a high fill 
or embankment. The width, depth and steep banks of this creek make 
these bridges of considerable importance. 



MAP READING. 13 

PART II. 

{Note : Part II presents the subject of Map Reading in a more compre- 
hensive manner than Part I.) 

19. A Map is a representation on paper of a certain portion of the 
earth's surface. 

20. A Military Map is one which shows the relative distances, direc- 
tions and elevations of all features of military importance on the ground 
represented. 

21. Scale of Maps. A map is drawn to scale, that is, each unit of dis- 
tance on the map must bear a fixed proportion to the corresponding dis- 
tance on the ground. If one inch on the map, for instance, equals one 
mile (63,360 inches) on the ground, then Vz inch equals % of a mile, or 
£3|£(i = 21,120 inches on the ground, etc. The term distance in this book 
means horizontal distance; vertical distance is called elevation or depres- 
sion, depending on whether the point spoken of is higher or lower than 
another. 

For example (see Fort Leavenworth map in back of book), the distance 
from Frenchman's (oc') in a straight line to McGuire (qh') is 2,075 yards, 
but to walk this distance would require the ascent and descent of Sentinel 
Hill, so that the actual length of travel would be considerably greater than 
the horizontal distance between the two points. In speaking of distance 
between towns, boundaries, etc., horizontal distance is always meant. The 
fixed relation between map distances and corresponding ground distances 
must be constantly kept in mind. 

22. Methods of Representing Scales. There are three ways in which 
the scale of the map may be represented: 

1st. By words and figures, as 3 inches = 1 mile ; 1 inch = 200 feet. 

2nd. By Representative Fraction (abbreviated R.F.), which is a frac- 
tion whose numerator represents units of distance on the map and whose 
denominator, units of distance on the ground. For example, R. F. = 

1 inch (on map) .... ., ^ « .- ^ . 

— which is equivalent to R. F. =§3^60. since 1 mile = 

1 mile (on ground) 

63,360 inches. So the expression, "R. F.533^" on a map merely means 
that 1 inch on the map represents 63,360 inches (or 1 mile) on the ground. 
This fraction is usually written with a numerator 1, as above, no definite 
unit of inches or miles being specified jn either the numerator or de- 
nominator. In this case the expression means that one unit of distance 
on the_map equals as many of the same units on the ground as are in the 
denominator. Thus, s^eo means that 1 inch on the map = 63,369 inches 



14 CHAPTER I. 

on the ground; 1 foot on the map = 63,360 feet on the ground; 1 yard 
on the map = 63,360 yards on the ground, etc. 

3d. By Graphical Scale, that is, a drawn scale. A graphical scale is a 
line drawn on the map, divided into equal parts, each part being marked 
not with its actual length, but with the distance which it represents on the 
ground. Thus, in Figure 1, page 2, the distance from to 50 represents 
50 yards on the ground ; the distance from to 100, 100 yards on the 
ground, etc. And if the scale were applied to road running from A to B 
(Figure 2, page 3), it would show that the length of the road is 675 yards. 

23. It will readily be seen that a map scale must be known by the stu- 
dent in order that he may have a correct idea of the distances between 
objects represented on the map. This is necessary in determining lengths 
of march, ranges of small arms and artillery, relative lengths of roads to 
a given point, etc. Therefore, if under service conditions one should have 
only a map without a scale, or one with only an R. F. on it, he would first 
of all be compelled to construct a graphical scale to read yards, miles, 
etc., or one showing how many miles one inch represents. Fortunately, 
almost every map has a graphical scale, and there will be but few occa- 
sions on which it will be necessary to construct a graphical scale. 

24. Construction of Scales. The following are the most usual problems 
that arise : 

1. Having given the R. F. on a map, to find how many miles on the 
ground are represented by i inch on the map. Let us suppose that the 
R. F. issxHo. 

Solution. 

Now, as previously explained, sii^o simply means that 1 inch on the map 
represents 21,120 inches on the ground. There are 63,360 inches in 1 
mile. 21,120 goes into 63,360 three times— that is to say, 21,120 is % of 
63,360, and we, therefore, see from this that 1 inch on the map represents 
% of a mile on the ground, and consequently it would take three inches 
on the map to represent 1 whole mile on the ground. So, we have this 
general rule: To find out how many miles i inch on the map represents 
on the ground, divide the denominator of the R. F. by 63,360. 

2. Being given the R. F. to construct a graphical scale to read yards. 
Let us assume that s T l 2 o is the R. F. given — that is to say, 1 inch on the 
map represents 21,120 inches on the ground, but, as there are 36 inches in 
1 yard, 21,120 inches ^VjPyds. = 586.66 yds.— that is, 1 inch on the map 
represents 586.66 yds. on the ground. Now, suppose about a 6-inch scale 
is desired. Since 1 inch on the map = 586.66 yards on the ground, 6 
inches (map) — 586.66 X 6 = 3,519.06 yards (ground). In order to get 



MAP READING. 15 

as nearly a 6-inch scale as possible to represent even hundreds of yards, 
let us assume 3,500 yards to be the total number to be represented by the 
scale. The question then resolves itself into this : How many inches on 
the map are necessary to represent 3,500 yards on the ground. Since, as 
we have seen, 1 inch (map) = 586.66 yards (ground), as many inches are 
necessary to show 3,500 yards as 586.66 is contained in 3,500; or, 5 3 8 5 6 .66 — 
5.96 inches. 



; ~- — _J A o 7535 7Tooo y~ 



*■"!-- -^1 '' / / / 

c ^-~<C / / / / 



/ 



*" r ' <t ~-* -* M*» sc^u 4 

Figure 10. 

Now lay off with a scale of equal parts the distance A-I (Figure 10) = 
5.96 inches (about 5 and 9 J A tenths), and divide it into 7 equal parts by 
the construction shown in figure, as follows: Draw a line A-H, making 
any convenient angle with A-I, and lay off 7 equal convenient lengths 
(A-B, B-C, C-D, etc.), so as to bring H abotit opposite to I. Join H 
and I and draw the intermediate lines through B, C, etc., parallel to H-I. 
These lines divide A-I into 7 equal parts, each 500 yards long. The left 
part, called the Extension, is similarly divided into 5 equal parts, each 
representing 100 yards. 

3. To construct a scale for a map with no scale. In this case, measure 
the distance between any two definite points on the ground represented, 
by pacing or otherwise, and scale off the corresponding map distance. 
Then see how the distance thus measured corresponds with the distance 
on the map between the two points. For example, let us suppose that the 
distance on the ground between two given points is 1 mile and that the 
distance between the corresponding points on the map is Y\ inch. We 
would, therefore, see that Y\ inch on the map = 1 mile on the ground. 
Hence T /$ inch would represent % of a mile, and 4-4, or 1 inch, would 
represent 4 X % — 4-3 = V/z miles. 

The R. F. is found as follows: 

linch 63,360 X 1% inches 

R. F. w w T - == Z~' T 8 4 480' 

V/z mile 1 inch 

From this a scale of yards is constructed as above (2). 



16 CHAPTER I. 

4. To construct a graphical scale from a scale expressed in unfamiliar 
units. There remains one more problem, which occurs when there is a 
scale on the map in words and figures, but it is expressed in unfamiliar 
units, such as the meter (= 39.37 inches), strides of a man or horse, rate 
of travel of column, etc. If a noncommissioned officer should come into 
possession of such a map, it would be impossible for him to have a correct 
idea of the distances on the map. If the scale were in inches to miles or 
yards, he could estimate the distance between any two points on the map 
to be so many inches and at once know the corresponding distance on 
the ground in miles or yards. But suppose the scale found on the map 
to be one inch = 100 strides (ground), then estimates could not be intel- 
ligently made by one unfamiliar with the length of the stride used. How- 
ever, suppose the stride was 60 inches long; we would then have this: 
Since 1 stride = 60 inches, 100 strides = 6,000 inches. But according to 
our supposition, 1 inch on the map = 100 strides on the ground; hence 1 
inch on the map = 6,000 inches on the ground, and we have as our R. F., 

1 inch (map) 

7T~- — ? 7 jT = ermn- A graphical scale can now be constructed 

6,000 inches (ground) 600 ° & * 

as in (2). 

Problems in Scales. 

The following problems should be solved to become familiar with the 
construction of scales : 

Problem No. i. The R. F. of a map is T ^ . Required : 1. The distance 
in miles shown by one inch on the map; 2. To construct a graphical scale 
of yards ; also one to read miles. 

Problem No. 2. A map has a graphical scale on which 1.5 inches reads 
500 strides. 1. What is the R. F. of the map? 2. How many miles are 
represented by 1 inch? 

Problem No. 3. The Leavenworth map in back of this book has a graph- 
ical scale and a measured distance of 1.25 inches reads 1,100 yards. Re- 
quired : 1. The R. F. of the map ; 2. Number of miles shown by 1 inch 
on the map. 

Problem No. 4. 1. Construct a scale to read yards for a map of R. F. 
— 2Ti2o- 2. How many inches represent 1 mile? 

26. Scaling- Distances from a Map. There are four methods of scal- 
ing distances from maps: 

1st. Apply a piece of straight edged paper to the distance between any 
two points, A and B, for instance, and mark the distance on the paper. 



MAP READING. 17 

Now, apply the paper to the graphical scale, Figure 2, page 3, and read 
the number of yards on the main scale and add the number indicated on 
the extension. For example : 600 + 75 = 675 yards. 

2nd. By taking the distance off with a pair of dividers and applying the 
dividers thus set to the graphical scale, the distance is read. 

3rd. By use of an instrument called a Map Measurer, Figure 11, set the 
hand on the face to read zero, roll the small wheel over the distance ; now 
roll the wheel in an opposite direction along the graphical scale, noting the 
number of yards passed over. Or, having rolled over the distance, note 
the number of inches on the dial and multiply this by the number of miles 
or other units per inch. A map measurer is valuable for use in solving 
map problems in patrolling, advance guard, outpost, etc. 




Figure 11. 

4th. Apply a scale of inches to the line to be measured, and multiply 
this distance by the number of miles per inch shown by the map. 

Having learned how to take off distances on the map, the next step in 
Map Reading is to determine differences of elevation. 

27. Method of Representing Differences of Elevation. Since maps 
are representations on paper of ground which has size not only in a horizontal 
(level) but in a vertical (up and down) direction, it is necessary to have 
some means of rapidly determining elevations. This is accomplished in 
one of three ways: 

1st. By means of Contours. A contour-line is the line in which a hori- 
zontal (level) plane cuts the surface of the ground. It may also be said 
that a contour-line is a line that joins points on the surface of the earth, 
which are the same height — that is, which are in the same level plane. 
The projection of a contour-line on a horizontal surface (a map) is called 
a contour. Elevations and depressions may, therefore, be represented on 



18 



CHAPTER I. 






maps by imagining the surface of the ground being cut by a number of 

horizontal planes that are the same distance apart, and then projecting 

(or shooting) on a horizontal plane the lines so cut on the earth's surface. 

(Note: Read over paragraph 12, page 6, before studying what follows.) 

28. Map Distances. The horizontal distance between contours on a 
map (called Map Distance, or M. D.) is proportional to the slope of the 
ground represented — that is to say, the greater the slope of the ground, 
the less is the horizontal distance between the contours ; the less the slope 
of the ground represented, the greater is the horizontal distance between 
the contours. 

SJooe of /Degree 



3 J foot 



668 IN. 



Figure 12, 



Slope 
(degrees) 


Rise 
(feet) 


Horizontal 
Distance 
(inches) 


1 deg. 


1 


688 


2 deg. 


1 


688 

344 

2 


3 deg. 


1 


688 

229 

3 


4 deg. 


1 


688 

172 

4 


5 deg. 


1 


688 

138 

5 



Figure 13. 

It is a fact that 688 inches horizontally on a i degree slope gives a 
vertical rise of one foot; 1376 inches, two feet, 2064 inches, three feet, 
etc., from which we see that on a slope of 1 degree, 688 inches multiplied 
by vertical rises of 1 foot, 2 feet, 3 feet, etc., gives us the corresponding 
horizontal distance in inches. For example, if the contour interval 
(Vertical Interval, V. I.) of a map is 10 feet, then 688 inches x 10 equals 
6880 inches, gives the horizontal ground distance corresponding to a rise 



MAP READING. 



19 



of 10 feet on a I degree slope. To reduce this horizontal ground distance 
to horizontal map distance, we would, for example, proceed as follows : 

Let us assume the R. F. to be 1/15840— that is to say, 15,840 inches on 
the ground equals 1 inch on the map, consequently, 6880 inches on the 
ground equals 6880/15840, equals .44 inch on the map. And in the case 
of 2 degrees, 3 degrees, etc., we would have: 
6880 



M. D. for 2° = 



M. D. for 3° = 



15840 X 2 



6880 



= .22 inch ; 



= .15 inch, etc. 



15840 X 3 

From the above, we have this rule: 

To construct a scale of M. D. for a map, multiply 688 by the contour 
interval (in feet) and the R. F. of the map, and divide the results by 
i, 2, S, 4, etc., and then lay off these distances as shown in Figue 9, page 9- 



M. D. (inches) 



FORMULA. 

688 X V.I. (feet) X R. F. 



Degrees (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) 

29. Slopes. Slopes are usually given in one of three ways : 1st, in 
degrees; 2nd in percentages; 3rd, in gradients (grades). 

ist. A one degree slope means that the angle between the horizontal 
and the given line is 1 degree (1°). See Figure 12, page 18. 

2d. A slope is said to be 1, 2, 3, etc., per cent, when 100 units horizontally 
correspond to a rise of 1, 2, 3, etc., units vertically. 

/ Per Ceni S/ope 

i ff*. 



too ft. 

2 Per Ceni Slope 



— tooftl 
/OPerCentl^. 



12ft. 




toft. 



— too ft 



Figure 14. 



3d. A slope is said to be one on one ( \ ), two on three, ( | ), etc., when 
one unit horizontal corresponds to 1 vertical; three horizontal correspond 



20 



CHAPTER I. 



to two vertical, etc. The numerator usually refers to the vertical dis- 
tance, and the denominator to the horizontal distance. 




Figure 15. 

Degrees of slope are usually used in military matters; percentages are 
often used for roads, almost always of railroads ; gradients are used of 
steep slopes, and usually of dimensions of trenches. 

EFFECT OF SLOPE ON MOVEMENTS. 

60 degrees or- \ inaccessible for Infantry; 

45 degrees or \ difficult for Infantry ; 

30 degrees or -|- inaccessible for Cavalry ; 

15 degrees or \ inaccessible for Artillery ; 
5 degrees oi j\ accessible for wagons. 
The Normal System of scales prescribed for U. S. Army field sketches 
is as follows: For road sketches, 3 inches = 1 mile, Vertical Interval be- 
tween contours (V. I.) = 20 ft.; for position sketches, 6 inches = 1 mile, 
V. I. = 10 ft. ; for fortification sketches, 12 inches = 1 mile, V. I. = 5 ft. 
On this system any given length of M.D. corresponds to the same slope 
on each of the scales. For instance, .15 inch between contours represents 
a 5° slope on the 3-inch, 6-inch and 12-inch maps of the Normal System. 
Figure 9, page 9, gives the normal scale of M. D.'s for slopes up to 8 
degrees. A scale of M. D.'s is usually printed on the margin of maps, near 
the geographical scale. 

Directions on Maps. 

30. Having given the means used for determining horizontal distances 
and relative elevations represented on a map, the next step is the determin- 
ation of horizontal directions. When these three facts (distance, height 



MAP READING. 



21 



and direction) are known of any point with respect to any other point, 
its position is then fully determined. For instance (see map in pocket at 
back of book, Pope Hill (sm') is 800 yards from Grant Hill (urn'), (using 
graphical scale), and it is 30 feet higher than Grant Hill, since it is on 
contour 870 and Grant Hill is on contour 840; Pope Hill is also due north 
of Grant Hill, that is, the north and south line through Grant Hill passes 
through Pope Hill. Therefore, the position of Pope Hill is fully deter- 
mined with respect to Grant Hill. 

The direction line from which other directions are measured is usually 
the true north and south line (known as the True Meridian) or the plane 
of the magnetic needle, called the Magnetic Meridian These two lines 
do not usually have the same positions, because at all points of the earth's 
surface the true meridian is the straight line joining the observer's posi- 
tion and the North Pole of the earth, whereas the direction of the mag- 
netic needle varies at different points of the earth, at some places pointing 
east of and at others west of, the True Pole. At the present time the 
angle which the magnetic needle (called Magnetic Declination) makes 
with the True Meridian, is at Fort Leavenworth, 8° 23' east of north. 




Figure 16. 



It is important to know this relation because maps usually show the 
True Meridian and an observer is generally supplied with a magnetic 
compass. Figure 16 shows the usual type of Box Compass. It has 4 
cardinal points, N, E, S and W marked, as well as a circle graduated in 
degrees from zero to 360°, clockwise around the circle. To read the mag- 
netic angle (called magnetic azimuth) of any point from the observer's 



22 



CHAPTER L 



position the north point of the compass circle is pointed toward the ob- 
ject and the angle indicated by the north end of the needle is read. 

Orientation. 

31. In order that directions on the map and on the ground shall cor- 
respond, it is necessary for the map to be oriented, that is, the true me- 
ridian of the map must lie in the same direction as the true meridian 
through the observer's position on the ground, which is only another way 
of saying that the lines that run north and south on the map must run in 
the same direction as the lines north and south on the ground. Every 
road, stream or other feature on the map will then run in the same direc- 
tion as the road, stream or other feature itself on the ground, and all the 
objects shown on the map can be quickly identified and picked out on the 
ground. 

Methods of Orientating a Map. 

32. jst. By magnetic needle : If the map has a magnetic meridian 
marked on it as is on the Leavenworth map (in pocket at back of book), 
place the sighting line, a-b, of the compass (Fig. 16) on the magnetic 



Maf true J/'orih 



May. JIT. 




true 



SoulA 

Figure 17 



MAP RBADING. 23 

meridian of the map and move the map around horizontally until the north 
end of the needle points toward the north of its circle, whereupon the 
map is oriented. If there is a true meridian on the map, but not a mag- 
netic meridian, one may be constructed as follows, if the magnetic declina- 
tion is known : 

(Fig. 17) : Place the true meridian of the map directly under the magnetic 
needle of the compass and then move the compass box until the needle 
reads an angle equal to the magnetic declination. A line in extension of 
the sighting line a'-b' will be the magnetic meridian. If the magnetic 
declination of the observer's position is not more than 4° or 5°, the orienta- 
tion will be given closely enough for ordinary purposes by taking the true 
and magnetic meridians to be identical. 

2d. If neither the magnetic nor the true meridian is on the map, but the 
observer's position on the ground is known: Move the map horizontally 
until the direction of some definite point on the ground is the same as its 
direction on the map; the map is then oriented. For example, suppose 
you are standing on the ground at 8, q k' , (Fort Leavenworth Map), and 
can see the U. S. Penitentiary off to the south. Hold the map in front 
of you and face toward the U. S. Penitentiary, moving the map until the 
line joining 8 and the U. S. Penitentiary (on the map) lies in the same 
direction as the line joining those two points on the ground. The map 
is now oriented. 

Having learned to orient a map and to locate his position on the map, 
the noncommissioned officer should then practice moving over the ground 
and at the same time keeping his map oriented and noting each ground fea- 
ture on the map as it is passed. This practice is of the greatest value in 
learning to read a map accurately and to estimate distances, directions and 
slopes correctly. 

True Meridian. 

33. The position of the true meridian may be found as follows (Fig. 
18) : Point the hour hand of a watch toward the sun; the line joining the 
pivot and the point midway between the hour hand and XII on the dial, 
will point toward the south, that is to say, if the observer stands so as 
to face the sun and the XII on the dial, he will be looking south. To 
point the hour hand exactly at the sun, stick a pin as at (a) Fig. 18 and 
bring the hour hand into the shadow. At night, a line drawn toward the 
north star from the observer's position is approximately a true meridian. 



24 



CHAPTER I. 




SOUTH 



Figure 18. 

The line joining the pointers of the Great Bear or Dipper, prolonged 
about six times its length passes nearly through the North Star, which 
can be recognized by its brilliancy. 

North Star 



Dipper 



/ 



Figure 19. 

Conventional Signs. 

34. Rivers, lakes, mountains, forests, roads, houses, telegraph lines, etc , 
are represented on maps by symbols called Conventional Signs, in which 
an effort is made to imitate the general appearance of the objects as seen 
from a high point directly overhead. On account of this similarity of the 
object to its sign or symbol on the map, the noncommissioned officer will 
usually have no trouble in deciding at once the meaning of a new symbol. 
Fig. 21 on page 26 gives Conventional Signs used on military maps, 
and they should be thoroughly learned so that their meaning will be 
known at a glance. 

There is a constant tendency to simplify the Conventional Signs, and 



MAP READING. 25 

very often simply the outline of an object, such as a forest, cultivated 
ground, etc., is indicated with the name of the object printed within the 
outline. Thus : 




Figure J5U. 

Such means are used very frequently in rapid sketching, on account of 
the time that they save. 

By reference to the map of Fort Leavenworth, the meaning of all its 
symbols is at once evident from the names printed thereon ; for example, 
that of a city, woods, roads, streams, railroad, etc. ; where no Conventional 
Sign is used on any area, it is to be understood that any growths thereon 
are not high enough to furnish any cover. As an exercise, pick out from 
the map the following conventional signs : Unimproved road, cemetery, 
railroad track, hedge, wire fence, orchard, streams, lake. The numbers 
on the various road crossings have no equivalent on the ground, but are 
placed on the maps to facilitate description of routes, etc. Often the num- 
bers at road crossings on other maps denote the elevation of these points. 

Visibility. 

35. The problem of visibility is based on the relations of contours and 
map distances previously discussed, and includes such matters as the de- 
termination of whether a point can or can not be seen from another; 
whether a certain line of march is concealed from the enemy ; whether a 
particular area is seen from a given point. For illustration, see Visibility, 
Problem, page — . 

On account of the necessary inaccuracy of all maps it is impossible to 
determine exactly how much ground is visible from any given point — 
that is, if a correct reading of the map shows a certain point to be just 
barely visible, then it would be unsafe to say positively that on the ground 
this point could be seen or could not be seen. It is, however, of great im- 



26 



CHAPTER I. 



Trees 



Streams 



Isolated 



A Forest-? 






Palms 



, * * Banana \ 1 



ooooooooeoooo 
ocooooooooooo 

9 o o o Orchard* ° 







o © o o 



Pine 



Bamboo 



Cultivated 




< > t 



* ' Vineyard ' 



itii 



a o e a o. o. a - ° o a -° a - o o. o 

;:•«•.•■• cotton? %o% 



Railroads 



Single Track 
Double Track 
Electric 

Improved 

Unimproved 

Trail 



ii i iii i i i 



Roads 



» Cemetary 

+ + + +*<+ 



Church 
Post office 
Waterworks 

Hedge 

Stone 

fVorm 

Wire barhed 

fVt're smooth 



i 

PO 



Fences 



&<tt»SK&*&&lfJX&ilfft&.-*.'>'.9 



Fader 15 'wide. 

Fordahle 

VnfordaMe 

In fa tifty 

Cavalry 

ArtilJery 

Sentry 

Videite 

Hospital 

Trench 

Camp 



111 I ill I I I I i I I HTX 



•H «|i 

6 
6 



A. A A A 



Obstacles 

Abattis "V ^"<$ 

Wire enlano/ement 
Pa/isades 

Demolitions 




Depression 

Cliffs 

Ravine 

Fill 

Cut 







^^^^^s^- 5 * 



■vxym&n JUMuXm ii iwyngxfflrw*- 



^■Mfc^'^'^iua'iMij'A'/fjiyiftviTilli'y'irfliinHir- 



Figure 21. 



MAP READING. 



27 



portance for the noncommissioned officer to be able to determine at a 
glance, within about one contour interval, whether or not such and such 
a point is visible ; or whether a given road is generally visible to a cer- 
tain scout, etc. For this reason no effort is made to give an exact mathe- 
matical solution of problems in visibility further than would be useful in 
practical work with a map in the solution of map problems in patrolling. 
In the solution of visibility problems, it is necessary that the noncom- 

Figure 22. 




-*£_ 



Figure 23. 



28 CHAPTER I. 

missioned officer should thoroughly understand the meaning of profiles 
and their construction. A profile is the line supposed to be cut from the 
surface of the earth by an imaginary vertical (up and down) plane. (See 
Fig. 23.) The representation of this line to scale on a sheet of paper is 
also called a profile. Figure 23 shows a profile on the line D-y (Figure 
32) in which the horizontal scale is the same as that of the map (Figure 
22) and the vertical scale is 1 inch = 40 feet. It is customary to draw a 
profile with a greater vertical than horizontal scale in order to make the 
slopes on the profile appear to the eye as they exist on the ground. Con- 
sequently, always note especially the vertical scale in examining any pro- 
file ; the horizontal scale is usually that of the map from which the profile 
is taken. 

A profile is constructed as follows (Fig. 23) : Draw a line D' — y' equal 
in length to D — y on the map. Lay off on this line from D' distances 
equal to the distances of the successive contours from D on the map. At 
each of these contour points erect a perpendicular equal to the elevation of 
this particular contour, as shown by the vertical scale (960, 940, 920, etc.) 
on the left. Join successively these verticals by a smooth curve, which is 
the required profile. Cross section paper with lines printed 1-10 inch apart 
horizontally and vertically simplifies the work of construction, by avoid- 
ing the necessity of laying off each individual distance. 

Visibility Problem. To determine whether an observer with his eye at 
D can see the bridge at XX (Figure 22). By examining the profile it is 
seen that an observer, with his eye at D, looking along the line D-XX, 
can see the ground as far as (a) ; from (a) to (b) is hidden from view 
by the ridge at (a); (b) to (c) is visible; (c) to (d) is hidden by the 
ridge at (c). By thus drawing the profiles, the visibility of any point 
from a given point may be determined. The work may be much short- 
ened by drawing the profile of only the observer's position (D) of the 
point in question, and of the probable obstructing points (a) and (c). 
v It is evidently unnecessary to construct the profile from D to x, because 
the slope being concave shows that it does not form an obstruction. 

The above method of determining visibility by means of a profile is 
valuable practice for learning slopes of ground, and the forms of the 
ground corresponding to different contour spacings. 

Visibility of Areas. 

36. To determine the area visible from a given point the same method is 
used. First mark off as invisible all areas hidden by woods, buildings, 



MAP READING. 29 

high hills, and then test the doubtful points along lines such as D — XX, 
Figure 22. With practice the noncommissioned officer can soon decide 
by inspection all except the very close cases. 

This method is a rapid approximation of the solution shown in the pro- 
file. In general it will not be practicable to determine the visibility of a 
point by this method closer than to say the line of sight pierces the ground 
between two adjoining contours. 



30 CHAPTER II. 



CHAPTER II. 

GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF APPLIED MINOR 

TACTICS.i 

1. To begin with, you want to bear in mind that there is nothing difficult, 
complicated or mysterious about applied minor tactics— it is just simply 
the application of plain, every-day common, horse sense — the whole thing 
consists in familiarizing yourself with certain general principles based on 
common sense and then applying them with common sense. Whatever you 
do, don't make the mistake of following blindly rules that you have read 
in books. 

2. One of the ablest officers in the Army has recently given this defini- 
tion of the Art of War: 

One-fifth is learned from books; 

One-fifth is common sense ; 

Three-fiffhs is knowing men and how to lead them. 

The man who would be successful in business must understand men 
and apply certain general business principles with common sense ; the man 
who would be a successful hunter must understand game and apply certain 
general hunting principles with common sense, and even the man who would 
be a successful fisherman must understand fish and apply certain general 
fishing principles with common sense. And so likewise the man who 
would lead other men successfully in battle must understand men and 
apply certain general tactical principles with common sense. 

3. Of course, the only reason for the existence of an army is the pos- 
sibility of war some day, and everything the soldier does — his drills, pa- 
rades, target practice, guard duty, schools of instruction, etc. — has in 
view only one end : The preparation of the soldier for the field of battle. 

4. While the responsibilities of noncommissioned officers in time of peace 
are important, in time of battle they are much more so ; for then their 
mistakes are paid for in human blood. 

What would you think of a pilot who was not capable of piloting a 

1 In the preparation of the first part of this chapter extracts, of words and of ideas, 
were made from a paper on Applied Minor Tactics read before the St. Louis Con- 
vention of the National Guard of the United States, in 1910, by Major J. F. Morrison, 
General Staff, U. S. Army. 



GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF 31 

APPLIED MINOR TACTICS. 

boat trying to pilot a boat loaded with passengers ; or, of an engineer who 
was not capable of running a locomotive trying to run a passenger train? 
You would, of course, think him criminal — but do you think he would be 
more criminal than the noncommissioned officer who is not capable of 
leading a squad in battle but who tries to do so, thereby sacrificing the 
lives of those under him? 

You can, therefore, appreciate the importance, the necessity, of every 
noncommissioned officer doing everything that he possibly can during 
times of peace to qualify himself for his duties and responsibilities during 
times of war. 

5. If we are going to have a good army we must have good regiments ; 
to have good regiments we must have good battalions ; to have good bat- 
talions we must have good companies ; to have good companies we must 
have good squads ; to have good squads we must have good squad leaders 
— efficient, noncommissioned officers zvho know their business. 

6. As stated before, everything in the life of the soldier leads to the 
field of battle. And so is it that in the subject of minor tactics all in- 
struction leads to the battle. First we have map problems ; then terrain 
exercises ; next the war game ; after that maneuvers, and finally the battle. 

7. Map Problems and Terrain Exercises. In the case of map problems 
you are given tactical problems to solve on a map ; in the case of ter- 
rain exercises you are given problems to solve on the ground. (The 
word "Terrain," means earth, ground.) These are the simplest forms of 
tactical problems, as you have only one phase of the action, your infor- 
mation is always reliable and your imaginary soldiers always do just ex- 
actly what you want them to do. 

8. War Game Next comes the war game, which consists of problems 
solved on maps, but you have an opponent who commands the enemy — 
the phases follow one another rapidly and the conditions change — your 
information is not so complete and reliable. However, your men being 
slips of cardboard or beads, they will, as in the case of your imaginary 
soldiers in the map problems and terrain exercises, go where you wish 
them to and do what you tell them to do — they can't misunderstand your 
instructions and go wrong — they don't straggle and get careless as real 
soldiers sometimes do. 

Map problems, terrain exercises and war games are but aids to maneu- 
vers — their practice makes the maneuvers better ; for you thus learn the 
principles of tactics and in the simplest and quickest way. 



32 CHAPTER II. 

9. Maneuvers. In the case of the maneuver the problem is the same as 
in the war game, except that you are dealing with real, live men whom you 
can not control perfectly, and there is, therefore, much greater chance for 
mistakes. 

10. The Battle. A battle is oidy a maneuver to which is added great 
physical danger and excitement. 

GENERAL RULES AND PRINCIPLES THAT MUST BE AP- 
PLIED IN MAP PROBLEMS, TERRAIN EXERCISES, THE WAR 
GAME AND MANEUVERS. 

11. Everything that is done must conform in principle to what should 
be done in battle — otherwise your work is wasted — your time is thrown 
away. 

In solving map problems and in the war game, always form in your 
mind a picture of the ground where the action is supposed to be taking 
place — imagine that you see the enemy, the various hills, streams, roads 
etc., that he is firing at you, etc. — and don't do anything that you would 
not be able to do if you were really on the ground and really in a fight. 

12. Whether it be a corporal in command of a squad or a general in 
command of an army, in the solution of a tactical problem, whether it be 
a map problem, a terrain exercise, a war game, maneuver or battle, he will 
have to go through the same operation : 

1st. Estimate the situation ; 

2nd. Decide what he will do; 

3rd. Give the necessary orders to carry out his decision. 

At first these three steps of the operation may appear difficult and la- 
borious, but after a little practice the mind, which always works with 
rapidity in accustomed channels, performs them with astonishing quick- 
ness. 

The child beginning the study of arithmetic, for example, is very slow in 
determining the sum of 7 and 8, but later the answer is announced al- 
most at sight. The same is true in tactical problems — the process may be 
slow at first, but with a little practice it becomes quick and easy. 

13. Estimating the Situation. This is simply "sizing up the situation," 
finding out what you're "up against," and is always the first thing to be 
done. It is most important, and in doing it the first step is to determine 
your MISSION — what you are to do, what you are to accomplish — the 
most important consideration in any military situation. 



GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF 33 

APPLIED MINOR TACTICS. 

Consider next your own forces and that of the enemy — that is, his prob- 
able strength and how it compares with yours. 

Consider the enemy's probable MISSION 1 and what he will probably 
do to accomplish it. 

Consider the geography, of the country so far as it affects the problem 
— the valleys to cross, defiles to pass through, shortest road to follow, etc. 

Now, consider the different courses open to you with the advantages 
and disadvantages of each. 

You must, of course, in every case know what you're up against before 
you can decide intelligently what you're going to do. 

In making your plan- always bear in mind not only your own MISSION 
but also the general mission of the command of which you form a part, 
and this is what nine men out of ten forget to do. 

14. You are now ready to come to a decision, which is nothing more or 
less than a clear, concise determination of what you're going to do and 
how you're going to do it. 

15. The Decision. It is important that you should come to a clear 
and correct decision — that you do so promptly and then execute it vig- 
orously. 

The new Japanese Field Service Regulations tell us that there are two 
things above all that should be avoided — inaction and hesitation. "To act 
resolutely even in an erroneous manner is better than to remain inactive 
and irresolute" — that is to say, do something. Frederick the Great, ex- 
pressed the same idea in fewer words : "Don't haggle." 

Having settled on a plan push it through — don't vacillate, don't waver. 
Make your plan simple. No other has much show. Complicated plans 
look well on paper, but in war they seldom work out. They require sev- 
eral people to do the right thing at the right time and this under condi- 
tions of excitement, danger and confusion, and as a result, they generally 
fail. 

16. The Order. Having completed your estimate of the situation and 
formed your plan, you are now ready to give the orders necessary to 
carry it out. 

You must first give your subordinates sufficient information of the situ- 
ation and your plan, so that they may clearly understand their mission. 

The better everyone understands the whole situation the better he can 

1 The word "mission" is used a great deal in this text. By your "mission" is meant 
your business, what you have been told to do, what you are trying to accomplish. 



34 CHAPTER 11. 

play his part. Unexpected things are always happening in war — a sub- 
ordinate can act intelligently only if he knows and understands what his 
superior wants to do. 

Always make your instructions definite and positive — vague instruc- 
tions are sometimes worse than none. 

Your order, your instructions, must be clear, concise and definite — 
everyone should know just exactly what he is to do. 

A Few General Principles. 

17. The man who hunts deer, moose, tigers and lions, is hunting big 
game, but the soldier operating in the enemy's territory is hunting bigger 
game — he's hunting for human beings — but you want to remember that the 
other fellow is out hunting for you, too ; he's out "gunning" for you. So, 
don't fail to be on the alert, on the look out, all the time, if you do he'll 
"get the drop" on you. Remember what Frederick the Great said : "It is 
pardonable to be defeated, but never to be taken by surprise." 

18. Do not separate your force too much; if you do, you weakei. your- 
self — you take the chance of being "defeated in detail" — that is, of one 
part being defeated after another. Remember the old saying: "In union 
there is strength." Undue extension of your line (a mistake, by the way, 
very often made) is only a form of separation and is equally as bad. 

19. While too much importance can not be attached to the proper use 
of cover, you must not forget that sometimes there are other considera- 
tions that outweigh the advantages of cover. Good sense alone can de- 
termine. A certain direction of attack, for instance, may afford rxcellent 
cover but it may be so situated as to mean ruin if defeated, as where it 
puts an impassable obstacle directly in your rear. And don't foi get that 
you should always think in advance of what you would do in case of 
defeat. 

20. What is it, after all, that gives victory, whether it be armies or only 
squads engaged? It's just simply inflicting on the enemy a loss which he 
will not stand before he can do the same to you. Now, what is this loss 
that he will not stand? What is the loss that will cause him to break? 
Well, it varies; it is subject to many conditions — different bodies oi troops, 
like different timbers, have different breaking points. However, what- 
ever it may be in any particular case it would soon come if we coul J shoot 
on the battlefield as we do on the target range, but we can not apprcximate 
it. 

There are many causes tending to drag down our score on the battle- 



GENERAL COMMON SENSE PRINCIPLES OF 35 

APPLIED MINOR TACTICS. 

field, one of the most potent being the effect of the enemy's fire It is 
cited as a physiological fact that fear and great excitement cause tl.e pupil 
of the eye to dilate and impair accuracy in vision and hence of shooting. 
It is well established that the effectiveness of the fire of one side is re- 
duced proportionately to the effectiveness of that of the other. 

21. Bear in mind then these two points — we must get the enemy's break- 
ing point before he gets ours, and the more effective we make our fire 
the less effective will be his. 

Expressed in another way — to win you must gain and keep a fire su- 
periority. 

This generally means more rifles in action, yet a fire badly controlled 
and directed, though great in volume, may be less effective than a smaller 
volume better handled. 

The firing line, barring a few exceptional cases, then, should be as 
heavy as practicable consistent with the men's free use of their rifles. 

This has been found to be about one man to the yard. In this way you 
get volume of fire and the companies do not cover so much ground that 
their commanders lose their power to direct and control. 

22. If it becomes necessary to hold a line too long for the force avail- 
able, it is then better to keep the men close together and leave gaps in the 
line. The men are so much better controlled, the fire better directed, the 
volume the same, and the gaps are closed by the cross fire of parties 
adjacent. 



36 CHAPTER III. 



CHAPTER III. 

GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS FOR 

NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES, BY 

SQUAD, SECTION, PLATOON OR COMPANY. 

(The wall map to be used for this instruction can be obtained from the 
U. S. Infantry Association, Washington, D. C, at a cost of $1.50.) 

23. The noncommissioned officers and the privates of the squad, sec- 
tion, platoon or company are seated in front of the instructor, who, with 
pointer in hand, is standing near the map on the wall. 

The instructor assumes certain situations and designates various non- 
commissioned officers to take charge of squads for the purpose of ac- 
complishing certain missions; he places them in different situations, and 
then asks them what they would do. He, or the noncommissioned officer 
designated to perform certain missions, designates certain privates to carry 
messages, watch for signals, take the place of wounded noncommissioned 
officers, etc. For example, the instructor says : "The battalion is march- 
ing to Watertown (see Elementary Map in pocket at back of book) along 
this road (indicating road) ; our company forms the advance guard; we 
are now at this point (indicating point). Corporal Smith, take your 
squad and reconnoiter the woods on the right to see if you can find any 
trace of the enemy there, and rejoin the company as soon as you can. 
Corporal Jones, be on the lookout for any signals that Corporal Smith 
may make." 

Corporal Smith then gives the command, "1. Forward, 2. MARCH," 
and such other commands as may be necessary. 

Instructor. Now, when you reach this point (indicating point), what 
do you see? 

(Corporal Smith holds his rifle horizontally above his head.) 

Corporal Jones. Captain, Corporal Smith signals that he sees a small 
body of the enemy. 

Corporal Smith. LIE DOWN. RANGE, 700. 1. READY; 2. AIM; 
3. Squad; 4. FIRE. 1. Forward; Double time; 2. MARCH, etc. 

The noncommissioned officers and the privates who are thus designated 
to do certain things must use their imagination as much as possible. They 
must look at the map and imagine that they are right on the ground, in 



GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS. 37 

the hostile territory: they must imagine that they see the streams, hills, 
woods, roads, etc., represented on the map, and they must not do any- 
thing that they could not do if in the hostile territory, with the assumed 
conditions actually existing. 

24. The general idea of this system of instruction is to make the non- 
commissioned officers and the privates THINK, to make them USE 
COMMON SENSE AND INITIATIVE in handling men in various situ- 
ations, in getting out of difficulties. By thus putting men on their mettle 
in the presence of their comrades and making them bring into play their 
common sense and their powers of resourcefulness, it is comparatively 
easy to hold the attention of a whole squad, section, platoon or company, 
for those who are not actually taking part in the solution of a particular 
problem are curious to see how those who are taking part will answer dif- 
ferent questions and do different things — how they will "pan out." 

25. Everything that is said, everything that is done, should, as far as 
practicable, be said and done just as it would be said and done in the field. 
The commands should be actually given, the messages actually delivered, 
the reports actually made, the orders and instructions actually given, the 
signals actually made, etc., just the same as they would be if the operations 
were real. Of course, sometimes it is not practicable to do this, and again 
at other times it would be advisable not to do so. If, for instance, in the 
solution of a problem there were a great many opportunities to give com- 
mands to fire, to make signals, to deliver messages, etc., and if these things 
were actually done every time, it would not only become tiresome but it 
would also delay the real work and instruction. Common sense must be 
used. Just bear this in mind : In the solution of map problems the non- 
commissioned officers and the privates are to be given proper and suffi- 
cient instruction in giving commands, making signals, sending and deliv- 
ering messages, making reports, etc., the instructor using his common 
sense in deciding what is proper and sufficient instruction. In carrying 
out this feature of the instruction it would be done thus, for instance: 

Instead of a platoon leader saying, "I would give the order for the pla- 
toon (two, three or four squads) to fire on them," he would say, for in- 
stance, "I would then give the command, 'AT LINE OF MEN. RANGE, 
600. FIRE AT WILL,' and would continue the firing as long as neces- 
sary." Should the instructor then say, for instance, "Very well ; the 
enemy's fire has slackened; what will you do now?" The platoon leader 
would answer, for instance, "I would signal : 1. By squads from the right ; 
2. RUSH." 



38 CHAPTER III. 

Instead of saying, for instance, "I would advance my squad to the top 
of this hill at double time," the squad leader should say, "I would give the 
command: '1. Forward, double time; 2. MARCH,' and upon reaching the 
top of this hill, I would command, '1. Squad; 2. HALT/ cautioning the 
men to take advantage of cover." 

Instead of saying, "I would signal back that we see the enemy in force," 
the squad leader should take a rifle and make the signal, and if a man has 
been designated to watch for signals, the man would say to the captain 
(or other person for whom he was watching for signals) : "Captain, Cor- 
poral Smith has signaled that he sees the enemy in force." 

Instead of saying, "I would send a message back that there are about 
twenty mounted men just in rear of the Jones' house; they are dismounted 
and their horses are being held by horseholders," say, "Smith, go back 
and tell the captain (or other person) there are about twenty mounted 
men just in rear of the Jones' house. They are dismounted and their 
horses are being held by horseholders." Pvt. Smith would then say to the 
captain (or other person), "Captain, Corporal Harris sends word there 
are about twenty men just in rear of the Jones' house. They are dis- 
mounted and their horses are being held by horseholders." 

For problems exemplifying this system of instruction, see page 64. 

26. The instruction may be varied a little by testing the squad leaders 
in their knowledge of map reading by asking, from time to time during 
the solution of the problem, such questions as these : 

Captain: Corporal Smith, you are standing on Lone Hill (see Elementary 
Map), facing north. Tell me what you see? 

Corporal: The hill slopes off steeply in front of me, about eighty feet down 
to the bottom land. A spur of the hill runs off on my right three-fourths 
of a mile to the north. Another runs off on my left the same distance to 
the west. Between these two spurs, down in front of me, is an almost 
level valley, extending about a mile to my right front, where a hill cuts 
off my view. To my left front it is level as far as I can see. A quarter of 
a mile in front of me is a big pond, down in the valley, and I can trace 
the course of a stream that drains the pond off to the northwest, by the 
trees along its bank. Just beyond the stream a railroad runs northwest 
along a fill and crosses the stream a mile and a half to the northwest, 
where I can see the roofs of a group of houses. A wagon road runs north 
across the valley, crossing the western spur of this hill 600 yards from 
Lone Hill. It is bordered by trees as far as the creek. Another road 
parallels the railroad, the two roads crossing near a large orchard a mile 
straight to my front. 



GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS. 39 

Captain: Can you see the Chester Pike where the railroad crosses it? 

Corporal: No, sir. 

Captain: Why? 

Corporal: Because the hill "62," about 800 yards from Lone Hill, is so 
high that it cuts off my view in that direction of everything closer to the 
spur "62" than the point in the Salem-Boling road, where the private lane 
runs off east to the Gray house. 

Captain: Sergeant Jones, in which direction does the stream run that 
you see just south of the Twin Hills? 

Sergeant: It runs south through York, because I can see that the north- 
ern end starts near the head of a valley and goes down into the open plain. 
Also it is indicated by a very narrow line near the Twin Hills which be- 
comes gradually wider or heavier the further south it goes. Furthermore, 
the fact that three short branch streams are shown joining together and 
forming one, must naturally mean that the direction of flow is towards the 
one formed by the three. 

Captain: Sergeant Harris, does the road from the Mason farm to the 
Welsh farm run up or down hill? 

Sergeant: It does both, sir. It is almost level for the first half mile west 
of the Mason farm ; then, as it crosses the contour marked 20 and a sec- 
ond marked 40, it runs up hill, rising to forty feet above the valley, 900 
yards east of the Mason farm. Then, as it again crosses a contour marked 
40 and a second marked 20, it goes down hill to the Welsh farm. That 
portion of the road between the points where it crosses the two contours 
marked 40, is the highest part on the road. It crosses this hill in a "sad- 
dle," for both north and south of this summit on the road are contours 
marked 60 and even higher. 

Captain: Corporal Wallace, you are in Salem with a patrol with orders 
to go to Oxford. There is no one to tell you anything about this section 
of the country and you have never been there before. You have this map 
and a compass. What would you do? 

Corporal: I would see from my map and by looking around me that 
Salem is situated at the crossing of two main roads. From the map I 
would see that one leads to Boling and the other was the one to take for 
Oxford. Also, I would see that the one to Boling started due north out of 
Salem and the other, the one I must follow, started due west out of Salem. 
Taking out my compass, I would see in what direction the north end of 
the needle pointed ; the road running off in that direction would be the one 
to Boling, so I would start off west on the other. 



40 CHAPTER III. 

Captain: Suppose you had no compass? 

Corporal: I would look and see on which side of the base of the trees 
the moss grew. That side would be north. Or, in this case, I would prob- 
ably not use a compass even if I had it; for, from the map, I know that 
the road I wish to start off on crosses a railroad track within sight of the 
crossroads and on the opposite side of the crossroads from the church 
shown on the map ; also, that the Boling road is level as far as I could 
see on the ground, while the Chester Pike crosses the spur of Sandy Ridge, 
about a half mile out of the village. 

Captain: Go ahead, Corporal, and explain how you would follow the 
proper route to Oxford. 

Corporal: I would proceed west on the Chester Pike, knowing I would 
cross a good sized stream, on a stone bridge, about a mile and a half out 
of Salem ; then I would pass a crossroad and find a swamp on my right, 
between the road and the stream. About a mile and a half from the cross- 
road I just mentioned, I would cross a railroad track and then I would 
know that at the fork of the roads one-quarter of a mile further on I must 
take the left fork. This road would take me straight into Oxford, about a 
mile and three-quarters beyond the fork. 

Captain: Sergeant Washington, do the contours about a half mile north 
of the Maxey farm, on the Salem-Boling road, represent a hill or a de- 
pression? 

Sergeant: They represent a hill, because the inner contour has a higher 
number, 42, than the outer, marked 20. They represent sort of a leg-of- 
mutton shaped hill about 42 feet higher than the surrounding low ground. 

27. Variety and interest may be added to the instruction by assuming 
that the squad leader has been killed or wounded and then designate some 
private to command the squad ; or that a man has been wounded in a 
certain part of the body and have a soldier actually apply his first aid 
packet; or that a soldier has fainted or been bitten by a rattlesnake and 
have a man actually render him first aid. 

28. The privates may be given practical instruction in delivering mes- 
sages by giving them messages in one room and having them deliver them 
to someone else in another room. It is a good plan to write out a num- 
ber of messages in advance on slips of paper or on cards, placing them in 
unsealed envelopes. An officer or a noncommissioned officer in one room 
reads one of the messages to a soldier, then seals it in an envelope and 
gives it to the soldier to hand to the person in another room to whom he is 
to deliver the message. The latter checks the accuracy of the message by 



GENERAL PLAN OF INSTRUCTION IN MAP PROBLEMS. 41 

means of the written message. Of course, this form of instruction should 
not be given during the solution of map problems by the men. (For model 
messages, see page 51.) 

The same slips or cards may be used any number of times with different 
soldiers. A soldier should never start on his way to deliver a message 
unless he understands thoroughly the message he is to deliver. 



42 CHAPTER IV. 



CHAPTER IV. 
THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 

PATROLLING. 

29. Patrols are small bodies of infantry or cavalry, from two men up 
to a company or troop, sent out from a command at any time to gain in- 
formation of the enemy and of the country, to drive off small hostile 
bodies, to prevent them from observing the command or for other stated 
objects, such as to blow up a bridge, destroy a railroad track, communi- 
cate or keep in touch with friendly troops, etc. Patrols are named accord- 
ing to their objects, reconnoitering, visiting, connecting, exploring, flank- 
ing patrols, etc. These names are of no importance, however, because the 
patrol's orders in each case determine its duties. 

30. The size of a patrol depends upon the mission it is to accomplish ; 
if it is to gain information only, it should be as small as possible, allowing 
two men for each probable message to be sent (this permits you to send 
messages and still have a working patrol remaining) ; if it is to light, it 
should be strong enough to defeat the probable enemy against it. For 
instance, a patrol of two men might be ordered to examine some high 
ground a few hundred yards off the road. On the other hand, during the 
recent war in Manchuria a Japanese patrol of 50 mounted men, to accom- 
plish its mission, marched 1,160 miles in the enemy's country and was out 
for 62 days. 

31. Patrol leaders: (a) Patrol leaders, usually noncommissioned 
officers, are selected for their endurance, keen eyesight, ability to 
think quickly and good military judgment. They should be able to read 
a map, make a sketch and send messages that are easily understood. Very 
important patrols are sometimes lead by officers. The leader should have a 
map, watch, field glass, compass, message blank and pencils. 

(b) The ability to lead a patrol correptly without a number of detailed 
orders or instructions, is one of the highest and most valuable qualifica- 
tions of a noncommissioned officer. Since a commander ordering out a 
patrol can only give general instructions as to what he desires, because he 
can not possibly foresee just what situations may arise, the patrol leader 






THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 43 

will be forced to use his own judgment to decide on the proper course to 
pursue when something of importance suddenly occurs. He is in sole 
command on the spot and must make his decisions entirely on his own 
judgment and make them instantly. He has to bear in mind first of all 
his mission — what his commander wants him to do. 

Possibly something may occur that should cause the patrol leader to un- 
dertake an entirely new mission and he must view the new situation from 
the standpoint of a higher commander. 

(c) More battles are lost through lack of information about the enemy 
than from any other cause, and it is the patrols lead by noncommissioned 
officers who must gather almost all of this information. A battalion or 
squadron stands a very good chance for defeating a regiment if the bat- 
talion commander knows all about the size, position and movements of the 
regiment and the regimental commander knows but a little about the bat- 
talion ; and this will all depend on how efficiently the patrols of the two 
forces are lead by the noncommissioned officers. 

32. Patrols are usually sent out from the advance party of an ad- 
vance guard, the rear party of a rear guard, the outguards (formerly called 
pickets) of an outpost, and the flank (extreme right or left) sections, 
companies or troops of a force in a fight, but they may be sent out from 
any part of a command. 

The commander usually states how strong a patrol shall be. 

33. Orders or Instructions — ( a ) The orders or instructions for a 
patrol must state clearly whenever possible: 

1. Where the enemy is or is supposed to be. 

2. Where friendly patrols or detachments are apt to be seen or en- 
countered and what the plans are for the body from which the patrol is 
sent out. 

3. What object the patrol is sent out to accomplish; what information is 
desired ; what features are of especial importance ; the general direction 
to be followed and how long to stay out in case the enemy is not met. 

4. Where reports are to be sent. 

(b) It often happens that, in the hurry and excitement of a sudden en- 
counter or other situation, there is no time or opportunity to give a patrol 
leader anything but the briefest instructions, such as "Take three men, 
Corporal, and locate their (the enemy's) right flank." In such a case 
the patrol leader through his knowledge of the general principles of pa- 



44 CHAPTER IV. 

trolling, combined with the exercise of his common sense, must determine 
for himself just what his commander wishes him to do. 

34. Inspection of a Patrol Before Departure. Whenever there is time 
and conditions permit, which most frequently is not the case, a patrol 
leader carefully inspects his men to see that they are in good physical con- 
dition ; that they have the proper equipment, ammunition and rations ; that 
their canteens are full, their horses (if mounted) are in good condition, 
not of a conspicuous color and not given to neighing, and that there is 
nothing about the equipment to rattle or glisten. The patrol leader should 
also see that the men have nothing with them (maps, orders, letters, news- 
papers, etc.) that, if captured, would give the enemy valuable information. 
This is a more important inspection than that regarding the condition of 
the equipment. 

Whenever possible the men for a patrol should be selected for their 
trustworthiness, experience and knack of finding their way in a strange 
country. 

35. Preparing a Patrol for the Start. The patrol leader having re- 
ceived his orders and having asked questions about anything he does not 
fully understand, makes his estimate of the situation (see Par. 13, page 
32). He then selects the number of men he needs, if this has been left 
to him, inspects them and carefully explains to them the orders he has 
received and how he intends to carry out these orders, making sure the 
men understand the mission of the patrol. He names some prominent 
place along the route they are going to follow where every one will hasten 
if the patrol should become scattered. 

For example: An infantry company has arrived at the town of York 
(see Elementary Map). Captain A, at 2 P. M., calls up Corporal B and 
three men of his squad. 

Captain A: Corporal, hostile infantry is reported to be at Oxford. Noth- 
ing else has been heard of the enemy. The company remains here tonight. 
You will take these three men and reconnoiter about two miles north along 
this road {indicates the Valley Pike) for signs of a hostile advance in this 
direction. 

Stay out until dusk. 

Corporal C has been sent out that road {points east along the County 
Road). 

Send messages here. Do you understand? 

Corporal B: Yes, sir; I am to— {here he practically repeats Captain A's 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 45 

orders, the three men listening). Is Corporal C to cover that hill (points 
toward Twin Hills) ? 

Captain A: No; you must cover that ground. Move out at once, Cor- 
poral. (Corporal B quickly glances at the men and sees that they have 
their proper equipment.) 

Corporal B (to his men) : You heard the Captain's orders. We will 
make for that hill (points to Twin Hills). Jones, I want you to go 150 
yards in advance of me ; Williams, follow me at 100 yards ; Smith, you'll 
stay with me. Jones, you'll leave this road after crossing the creek and 
march on that clump of trees. I want both you and Williams to be on the 
alert and watch me every minute for signals. In case we become scattered, 
make for that hill (points to Twin Hills). 

Private Jones: Corporal, shall I keep 150 yards from you or will you 
keep the correct distance? 

Corporal B: You keep the correct distance from me. Forward, Jones. 

Of course, the patrol leader makes all these preparations if he has time ; 
but, as we have said before, there will be a great many occasions when he 
is required to start out so promptly that he will not have any time for the 
inspection described and he will have to make an estimate of the situation 
and give his detailed orders to the members of his patrol as they start off. 

THE PRINCIPLES OF PATROLLING. 

36. Paragraphs 37 to 80 describe the methods of leading a patrol — the 
points a patrol leader should fully understand. In other words, they state 
the principles of patrolling. When you first study this chapter, simply 
read over these principles without trying to memorize any of them. When- 
ever one of the principles is applied in the solution of any of the problems 
on patrolling given in this book you will generally find the number of the 
paragraph which states that principle enclosed in brackets. Turn back 
and study the paragraph referred to until you thoroughly understand its 
meaning and you feel sure that you know how to apply that principle 
whenever the occasion might arise in actual patrolling. Try to impress its 
common sense meaning (never the mere words) on your mind, so that 
when a situation arises requiring the sort of action indicated in the 
principle, YOU WILL NOT FAIL TO RECOGNIZE IT. 

37. Formation of Patrols — (a) Figure 1 gives some examples of vari- 
ous ways of forming patrols. These are merely examples for the purpose 
of giving a general idea of the arrangement of the men. In practice com- 



46 



CHAPTER IV. 



mon sense must dictate to the patrol leader the best formation in each case, 
(b) In very small patrols the leader is usually in advance where he can 
easily lead the patrol, though not always (see E, Figure 1). The dis- 
tance between men depends upon the character of the country and the 
situation. In L, Figure 1, it might be anywhere from 150 to 400 yards 







from the leading man to the last, the distance being greater in level or 
open country. Some such formation as G, Figure 1, could be used in go- 
ing through high brush, woods, or over very open country. 

(c) The men must be so arranged that each man will be within signal- 
ing distance of some member of the patrol and the escape of at least one 
man, in case of surprise, is certain. 

It must be remembered that the patrol may have to march a long dis- 






THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 47 

tance before it is expected that the enemy will be encountered, or it may 
have a mission that requires it to hurry to some distant point through very 
dangerous country. In such cases the patrol will probably have to follow 
the road in order to make the necessary speed, and it will not be possible 
for flankers to keep up this rate marching off the road. The formation in 
such cases would be something like those shown in F, H and O. 

Marching off the road is always slow work, so when rapidity is essen- 
tial, some safe formation for road travel is necessary, as in F, L and O. 

If, from the road the country for, say, l / 2 mile on each side, can be seen, 
there is absolutely no use in sending out flankers a few hundred yards 
from the road. Use common sense. 

38. Rate of March— (a) Patrols should advance quickly and quietly; 
be vigilant and make all practicable use of cover. If rapid marching is 
necessary to accomplish the mission, then little attention can be paid to 
cover. 

(b) Returning patrols, near their own lines, march at a walk, unless 
pressed by the enemy. A patrol should not, if* possible, return over its 
outgoing route, as the enemy may have observed it and be watching for 
its return. 

39. Scattered Patrols. A scattered patrol reassembles at some point 
previously selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut 
off, it returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it 
scatters, so that at least one man may return with information. 

Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol and con- 
tinue the reconnaisance with one or two men ; in case of cavalry the leader 
and men thus detached should be well mounted. 

40. Night Work. Patrols far from their commands or in contact with 
the enemy, often remain out over night. In such cases they seek a place 
of concealment unknown to the inhabitants, proceeding thereto after night- 
fall or under cover. Opportunities for watering, feeding and rest must not 
be neglected, for there is no assurance that further opportunities will pre- 
sent themselves. When necessary the leader provides for subsistence by 
demand or purchase. ' 

41. Civilians. In questioning civilians care must be taken not to disclose 
information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers must not be 
allowed to go ahead of the patrol as they might give the enemy notice of 
its approach. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize telegrams and mail 



48 CHAPTER IV. 

matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the facts as soon as possible. 

42. Patrol Fighting — (a) A patrol sent out for informationnever rights 
unless it can only get its information by righting or is forced to fight in 
order to escape. This principle is the one most frequently violated by pa- 
trol leaders, particularly in peace maneuvers. They forget their mission — 
the thing their commander sent them out to do — and begin fighting, thus 
doing harm and accomplishing no important results. 

(b) A patrol sent out to drive off hostile detachments has to fight to ac- 
complish its mission. Sometimes a patrol has orders both to gain informa- 
tion and to drive back hostile patrols. In this case it may be proper to 
avoid a fight at one moment and to seek a fight at another. The patrol 
leader must always think of his mission when deciding on the proper 
course to follow, and then use common sense. 

43. Signals — (a) In addition to the signals prescribed by the Infantry 
Drill Regulations (Par. 43, p. 18, Infantry Drill Regulations), the follow- 
ing should be clearly understood by members of a patrol : 

Enemy in sight in small numbers: Hold the rifle above the head hori- 
zontally. 

Enemy in force: Same as preceding, raising and lowering the rifle sev- 
eral times. 

Take cover: A downward motion of the hand. 

(b) Other signals may be agreed upon before starting, but they must 
be simple and familiar to the men; complicated signals must be avoided. 
Signals must be used cautiously, so as not to convey information to the 
enemy. 

The patrol leader should see that all his men thoroughly understand 
that whenever they are away from the center of the patrol they must look 
to the nearest man for signals at least once every minute. It should never 
be necessary for the patrol leader to call to a man in order to get his at- 
tention. All movements of men at a distance should be regulated by sig- 
nals and the men should constantly be on the lookout for these signals. 

44. Messages — (a) The most skillful patrol leading is useless unless 
the leader fully understands when to send a message and how to write it. 

(b) A message, whether written or verbal, should be short and clear, 
resembling a telegram. If it is a long account it will take too much time 
to write, be easily misunderstood, and if verbal, the messenger will usu- 
ally forget parts of it and confuse the remainder. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 49 

(c) Always state when and where things are seen or reported. If 
haste is required, do not use up valuable moments writing down the day 
of the month, the hour the message is written, etc. These data are es- 
sential as a matter of future record for formal telegrams and should be 
put in patrol messages only when time is abundant, but never slight the 
essential points of information that will give valuable help to your chief. 
Always try to put yourself in his place — not seeing what you see and read 
your message — and then ask yourself, What will he want to know? 

(d) The exact location of the enemy should be stated; whether de- 
ployed, marching or in camp, his strength, arm of the service (cavalry, in- 
fantry or artillery), and any other detail that you think would be valuable 
information for your chief. In giving your location do not refer to houses, 
streets, etc., that your chief in the rear has no knowledge of. Give your 
direction and distance from some point he knows of or, if you have a map 
like his, you can give your map location. 

(e) Be sure your message is accurate. This does not mean that some- 
thing told you should not be reported, but it should be reported, not as a 
fact, but as it is — a statement by somebody else. It is well to add any in- 
formation about your informant, such as his apparent honesty, the prob- 
ability of his having correct information, etc. — this may help your chief. 

(f) A message should always end with a short statement of what you 
are going to do next. For example : "Will remain in observation," "Will 
continue north," "Will work around to their rear," etc. Time permitting, 
the bearer of a verbal message should always be required to repeat it be- 
fore leaving. 

(g) The following is a reproduction of a message blank used in field 
service. The instructions on the envelope are also given. A patrol leader 
will usually be furnished with a pad of these blanks: 



50 



CHAPTER IV. 



U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE 



No. 



Sent by Time 



(These sp 



aces for Sig 



Rec'd by 
nal Operato 



Time 
rs only) 



Check 



Communicated by 

Buzzer, Phone, Telegraph, 
Wireless, Lantern, Helio, 
Flag, Cyclist, Foot Messen- 
ger, Mounted Messenger. 

Underscore means used 



From 

At - 
Date- 



(Name of sending detachment) 



(Location of sending detachment) 



.Hour No. 



To 



Received 



The heading "From" is filled in with the name of the detachment sending the 
information; as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent on the same day from the 
same source to the same person are numbered consecutively. The address is written 
briefly; thus, "Commanding Officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the 
writer's surname only and rank are given. 

This blank is four and a half by eight inches, including the margin on the left 
for binding. The back is ruled in squares and provided with scales for use in making 
simple sketches explanatory of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in 
blocks of forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and 
one fourth inches and is printed as follows: 



To 



U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE 
No.. 



(For Signal operators only) 



When sent No. 

Rate of speed 

Name of Messenger 

When and by whom rec'd 

THIS ENVELOPE WILE BE RETURNED TO BEARER 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 51 

MODEL MESSAGES. 

1. Verbal. "Four hostile infantrymen one mile north of our camp, mov- 
ing south. I will continue north." 

2. Verbal. "About one hundred hostile infantrymen two miles north of 
our camp at two o'clock, marching south. Will observe them." 

3. Verbal. "Long column of troops marching west in Sandy Creek Val- 
ley at two o'clock. Will report details later." 

4. Verbal "Just fired on by cavalry patrol near Baker's Pond. Will 
work to their rear." 

5. Written. Patrol from Support No. 2, 

Lone Hill, 
26 Mch. 11, 8-15 A. M., No. 1. 
C. O., 
Support No. 2. 

SeeTiostile troop of cavalry halted at x-roads, one mile S. of our out- 
guards. Nothing else in sight. Will remain here in observation. 

James, 
Corporal. 

6. Written (very hurriedlv). Lone Hill, 8-30, No. 2. 
C. O., 

Support No. 2. 
Column of about 300 hostile cavalry trotting north towards hostile 
troop of cavalry now halted at x-roads one mile south of our outguards. 
Will remain here. 

James, 

Cpl. 

7. Written. Patrol from 5th Inf., 

S. E. corner Boling Woods, 
3 Apl. 11, 2-10 P. M., No. 2. 
Adjutant, 

5th Inf., near Baker House. 
Extreme right of hostile line ends at R. R. cut N. E. of BAKER'S 
POND. Entrenchments run S. from cut along crest of ridge. Line appears 
to be strongly held. Can see no troops in rear of line. Will reconnoiter 
their rear. 

Smith, 
Sergeant. 

8. Written (from cavalry patrol far to front). 

Patrol from Tr. B, 7th Cav., 

Boling, 
14 June, 12, 10 A. M., No. 3. 
To C. O., 

Tr. B, 7th Cav., 

S. on Chester Pike. 
No traces of enemy up to this point. Telegraph operator here reports 



52 CHAPTER IV. 

wires running north from Boling were cut somewhere at 8-30 A. M. In- 
habitants appear friendly. Will proceed north. 

Jones, 
Sergeant. 
9. Written (from cavalry patrol far to front). 

Patrol from Tr. B, 7th Cav., 

Oxford, 
8 July, 12, 10-15 A. M., No. 2. 
To C O., 

1st Sq. 7th Cav., 

On Valley Pike, S. of York. 

Bearer has canteen found in road here, marked "85 CAV.— Ill CORPS." 

Inhabitants say no enemy seen here. They appear hostile and unreliable. 

No telegraph operator or records remain here. Roads good macadam. 

Water and haystacks plentiful. Will move rapidly on towards CHESTER. 

Lewis, 
Sergeant. 
Patrol from Support No. 3, 
On Ry. 24 mi - N. of County Road, 

2 Aug. 12, 9-15 P. M., No. 1 
C. O., 

Support No. 2, 

Near Maxey House. 
R. R. crosses creek here on 80-foot steel trestle. Hostile detachment is 
posted at N. end. Strength unknown. Creek 5 ft. deep by 60 ft. wide, with 
steep banks, 5 ft. high. Flows through meadow land. Scattered trees 
along banks. R. R. approaches each end of trestle on 10-foot fill. R. R. 
switch to N. E. 700 yds. S. of bridge. (See sketch on back.) I will cross 
creek to N. of bridge. 

Brown, 
Corporal. 
45. A message should be sent as soon as the enemy is first seen or re- 
ported. Of course, if the enemy is actually known to be in the vicinity and 
his patrols have been seen, etc., you must by all means avoid wasting your 
men by sending them back with information about small hostile patrols or 
other things you know your chief is already aware of and did not specifi- 
cally tell you to hunt for. 

If you have properly determined in your own mind what your mission is 
then you will have no trouble in deciding when to send messages. For 
example, suppose your orders are "To reconnoiter along that ridge and 
determine if the enemy is present in strength," and you sight a patrol of 
eight men. You would waste no time or men sending back any message 
about the patrol, for your mission is to find out if strong bodies of the 
enemy are about. But suppose that while working under the above orders 
you located a hostile battalion of infantry — a large body of troops. In this 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 53 

case you would surely send a detailed message as your mission is to de- 
termine if the enemy was present in strength. 

Again, suppose that while moving towards the ridge indicated by your 
chief in his orders, you saw his force suddenly and heavily fired on from 
a new and apparently unexpected quarter, not a great distance from you, 
but not on the ridge referred to. You knoiv or believe none of your pa- 
trols are out in that neighborhood. In this case you should realize in- 
stantly, without any order, that your mission had changed and you should 
hasten to discover the size and position of this new enemy and send the 
information back to your chief, first notifying him of your intended change 
of direction. 

Never forget your mission in the excitement of leading your own little 
force. 

46. Absence of the Enemy. It is frequently just as important to send a 
message to your chief that the enemy is not in a certain locality as it is 
to report his actual whereabouts. You must determine from your mission 
when this is the case. For example, if you were ordered "To patrol be- 
yond that woods and see if any hostile columns are moving in that direc- 
tion," and on reaching the far side of the woods you had a good view of 
the country for some distance beyond, it would be very important to send 
a message back telling your chief that you could see, say, one-half mile 
beyond the woods and there was no enemy in sight. This information 
would be of the greatest importance to him. He might feel free to move 
troops immediately from that vicinity to some more dangerous place. You 
would then continue your reconnaissance further to the front. 

SUGGESTION FOR GAINING INFORMATION ABOUT THE 

ENEMY. 

47. Enemy on the March — (a) The patrol should observe the march 
of the column from a concealed position that hostile patrols or flankers 
are not apt to search (avoid conspicuous places). Always try to discover 
if one hostile detachment is followed by another — if what can be seen ap- 
pears to be an advance guard of a larger body not yet in view. The dis- 
tance between the detachments, their relative size, etc., is always important. 

(b) Estimating Strength of Column. The strength of a column may be 
estimated from the length of time it takes to pass a selected point. As 
infantry in column of squads occupies half a yard per man, cavalry one 
yard per horse and arillery in single file twenty yards per gun or caisson 



54 CHAPTER IV. 

(ammunition wagon), a selected point would be passed in one minute by 
175 infantry; 110 cavalry (at a walk) ; 200 cavalry at a trot and 5 guns 
or caissons. If marching in columns of twos, take one-half of the above 
figures. 

(c) Dust. The direction of march, strength and composition (infantry, 
cavalry or artillery) of a column can be closely estimated from the length 
and character of the cloud of dust that it makes. Dust from infantry 
hangs low ; from cavalry it is higher, disperses more quickly, and, if the 
cavalry moves rapidly, the upper part of the cloud is thinner ; from artil- 
lery and wagons, it is of unequal height and disconnected. The effect of 
the wind blowing the dust must be considered. 

(d) Trail of Column. Evenly trodden ground indicates infantry; prints 
of horseshoes mean cavalry and deep and wide wheel tracks indicate ar- 
tillery. If the trail is fresh, the column passed recently; if narrow, the 
troops felt secure and were marching in column of route : if broad they 
expected an action and were prepared to deploy. A retreating army makes 
a broad trail across fields, especially at the start. 

Always remember that the smallest or most insignificant things, such as 
the number of a regiment or a discarded canteen or collar ornament, may 
give the most valuable information to a higher commander. For example, 
the markings on a discarded canteen or knapsack might prove to a gen- 
eral commanding an army that a certain hostile division, corps, or other 
force was in front of him when he thought it had not been sent into the 
field. The markings on the canteen would convey little or no meaning to 
the patrol leader, but if he realized his duty he would take care to report 
the facts. Cavalry patrols working far ahead of the foot troops should be 
most careful to observe and report on such details. 

(e) Reflection of weapons. If brilliant, the troops are marching toward 
you, otherwise they are probably marching away from you. 

48. Enemy in Position — (a) // an outpost line, the patrol locates the line 
of sentinels, their positions, the location and strength of the outguards and, 
as far as possible, all troops in rear. The location of the flanks of the line, 
whether in a strong or weak position, is of the utmost importance. Places 
where the line may be most easily penetrated should be searched for and 
the strength and routes of the hostile patrols observed. 

As outposts are usually changed at dawn this is the best time to recon- 
noiter their positions. 

(b) A hostile line of battle is usually hard to approach, but its extent, 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 55 

where the flanks rest and whether or not other troops are in rear of these 
flanks, should be most carefully determined. 

Information as to the flanks of any force, the character of the country 
on each flank, etc., is always of the greatest importance, because the flanks 
are the weakest portions of a line. In attacking an enemy an effort is 
almost always made to bring the heaviest fire or blow to bear on one of 
his flanks. Naturally all information about this most vulnerable part of 
an enemy is of great importance. 

49. Prisoners. When a patrol is ordered to secure prisoners they should 
be questioned as soon as captured, while still excited and their replies can 
in a way be verified. Their answers should be written down (unknown to 
them) and sent back with them as a check on what they may say on sec- 
ond thought. 

Prisoners should always be questioned as to the following points : What 
regiment, brigade, division, etc., they belong to ; how long they have been 
in position, on the march, etc. ; how much sickness in their organization ; 
whether their rations are satisfactory ; who commands their troops, etc. 
Always try to make the prisoners think the questions are asked out of 
mere curiosity. 

50. Camp Noises. The rumble of vehicles, cracking of whips, neighing 
of horses, braying of mules and barking of dogs often indicate the arrival 
or departure of troops. If the noise remains in the same place and new 
fires are lighted, it is probable that reinforcements have arrived. If the 
noise grows more indistinct, the troops are probably withdrawing. If, 
added to this, the fires appear to be dying out, and the enemy seems to re- 
double the vigilance of the outposts, the indications of retreat are strong. 

51. Abandoned Camps — (a) Indications are found in the remains of 
camp fires. They will show, by their degree of freshness, whether much 
or little time elapsed since the enemy left the place, and the quantity of 
cinders will give an indication of the length of time he occupied it. They 
will also furnish a means of estimating his force approximately, ten men 
being allowed to each fire. 

(b) Other valuable indications in regard to the length of time the po- 
sition was occupied and the time when it was abandoned may be found in 
the evidence of care or haste in the construction of huts or shelters, and 
in the freshness of straw, grain, dung or the entrails of slaughtered ani- 
mals. Abandoned clothing, equipments or harness will give a clue to the 



56 CHAPTER IV. 

arms and regiments composing a retreating force. Dead horses lymg 
about, broken weapons, discarded knapsacks, abandoned and broken-down 
wagons, etc., are indications of the fatigue and demoralization of the com- 
mand. Bloody bandages lying about, an^d many fresh graves, are evidences 
that the enemy is heavily burdened with wounded or sick. 

52. Flames and Smoke. If at night the flames of an enemy's camp fires 
disappear and reappear, something is moving between the observer and 
the fires. If smoke as well as flame is visible, the fires are very near. If 
the fires are very numerous and lighted successively, and if soon after be- 
ing lighted they go out, it is probable that the enemy is preparing a retreat 
and trying to deceive us. If the fires burn brightly and clearly at a late 
hour, the enemy has probably gone, and has left a detachment to keep the 
fires burning. If, at an unusual time, much smoke is seen ascending from 
an enemy's camp, it is probable that he is engaged in cooking preparatory 
to moving off. 

If lines of smoke are seen rising at several points along a railway line 
in the enemy's rear, it may be surmised that the railroad is being destroyed 
by burning the crossties, and that a retreat is planned. 

53. Limits of Vision — (a) On a clear day a man with good vision can 
see: 

At a distance of 9 to 12 miles, church spires and towers ; 

At a distance of 5 to 7 miles, windmills; 

At a distance of 2 to 2 J A miles, chimneys of light color ; 

At a distance of 2,000 yards, trunks of large trees ; 

At a distance of 1,000 yards, single posts ; 

At 500 yards the panes of glass may be distinguished in a window. 

(b) Troops are visible at 2,000 yards, at which distance a mounted man 
looks like a mere speck ; at 1,200 yards infantry can be distinguished from 
cavalry ; at 1,000 yards a line of men looks like a broad belt ; at 600 yards 
the files of a squad can be counted, and at 400 yards the movements of 
the arms and. legs can be plainly seen. 

(c) The larger, brighter or better lighted an object is, the nearer it 
seems. An object seems nearer when it has a dark background than when 
it has a light one, and closer to the observer when the air is clear than 
when it is raining, snowing, foggy or the atmosphere is filled with smoke. 
An object looks farther off when the observer is facing the sun than when 
he has his back to it. A smooth expanse of snow, grain fields or water 
makes distances seem shorter than they really are. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 57 

SUGGESTIONS FOR THE RECONNAISSANCE OF VARIOUS 
POSITIONS AND LOCALITIES. 

54. Cross roads should be reconnoitered in each direction for a dis- 
tance depending on how rapidly the patrol must continue on, how far from 
the main road the first turn or high point is, etc. The main body of the 
patrol usually remains halted near the crossroads, while flankers do the 
reconnoitering. 

55. Heights. In reconnoitering a height, if the patrol is large enough to 
admit of detaching them, one or two men climb the slope on either flank, 
keeping in sight of the patrol, if possible. In any case, one man moves 
cautiously up the hill, followed by the others in the file at such distance 
that each keeps his predecessor in view. 

56. Defiles. On approaching a defile, if time permits, the heights on 
either side are reconnoitered by flankers before the patrol passes through, 
in single file at double time, the distance being the same as in ascending a 
hill. The same method is adopted in reconnoitering a railroad cut or 
sunken road. 

57. Bridges and Fords. At a bridge or ford, the front of the patrol is 
contracted so as to bring all the men to the passage. The leading pa- 
trolers cross first and reconnoiter the far side to prevent the possibility of 
the enemy surprising the main body of the , patrol as it is crossing the 
bridge. The patrol then crosses rapidly, and takes up a proper formation. 
A bridge is first examined to see that it is safe and has not been tampered 
with by the enemy. 

58. Woods. The patrol enters a wood in skirmishing order, the intervals 
being as great as may be consistent with mutual observation and support 
on the part of the members of the patrol. On arriving at the farther edge 
of the wood, the patrol remains concealed and carefully looks about be- 
for passing out to open ground. When there is such a growth of under- 
brush as to make this method impracticable, and it is necessary to enter 
a wood by a road, the road is reconnoitered as in case of defile, though 
not usually at double time. 

59. Enclosures. In reconnoitering an enclosure, such as a garden, 
park or cemetery, the leading patrolers first examine the exterior, to make 
sure that the enemy is not concealed behind one of the faces of the en- 
closure. They then proceed to examine the interior. Great care is taken 



58 CHAPTER IV. 

in reconnoitering and entering an enclosure to avoid being caught in a 
confined or restricted space by the enemy. 

60. Positions. In approaching a position^ but one man advances (one 
is less liable to be detected than two or more), and he crawls cautiously 
toward the crest of the hill or edge of the wood or opening of the defile, 
while the others remain concealed in the rear until he signals them to 
advance. 

61. Houses. When a house is approached by a patrol, it is first re- 
connoitered from a distance, and if nothing suspicious is seen, it is then 
approached by one or two men, the rest of the party remaining concealed 
in observation. If the patrol is large enough to admit of it, four men 
approach the house, so as to examine the front and back entrances at the 
same time. Only one man enters the door, the others remaining outside 
to give the alarm, should a party of the enemy be concealed in the house. 
The patrol does not remain in the vicinity of the house any longer than 
necessary, as information relative to its numbers and movements might 
be given to the enemy, if a hostile party should subsequently visit the place. 
Farmhouses are searched for newspapers and the inhabitants questioned. 

62. Villages — (a) In approaching a small village one or two men are 
sent in to reconnoiter and one around each flank, but the main body does 
not enter until the scouts have reported. In small patrols of three to six 
men so much dispersion is not safe and only one section of the village can 
be reconnoitered at a time. 

(b) If the presence of the enemy is not apparent, the patrol enters the 
village. A suitable formation would be in single file at proper distance, 
each man being on the opposite side of the street from his predecessor, 
thus presenting a more difficult target for hostile fire and enabling the men 
to watch all windows. 

(c) 7/ the patrol is strong enough, it seizes the post office, telegraph 
office and railroad stations, and secures all important papers, such as files 
of telegrams sent and received, instructions to postmasters, orders of town 
mayor, etc., that may be there. If the patrol is part of the advance guard, 
it seizes the mayor and postmaster of the place and turns them over to the 
commander of the van guard with the papers seized. 

(d) While searching a village sentinels are placed at points of de- 
parture to prevent any of the inhabitants from leaving. Tall buildings 
and steeples are ascended and an extensive view of the surrounding coun- 
try obtained. 






THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 59 

(e) At night a village is more cautiously approached by a small party 
than by day. The patrol glides through back alleys, across gardens, etc., 
rather than along the main street. If there are no signs of the enemy, it 
makes inquiry. If no light is seen, and it seems imprudent to rouse any of 
the people, the patrol watches and captures one of the inhabitants, and 
gets from him such information as he may possess. 

(f) The best time for a patrol to approach a village is at early dawn, 
when it is light enough to see, but before the inhabitants are up. It is 
dangerous in the extreme for a small patrol to enter a village unless it is 
certain that it is not occupied by the enemy, for the men could be shot 
down by fire from the windows, cellarways, etc., or entrapped and cap- 
tured. As a rule large towns and cities are not entered by small patrols, 
but are watched from the outside, as a small force cannot effectively rec- 
onnoiter and protect itself in such a place. 

FACTS WHICH SHOULD BE OBTAINED BY PATROLS IN 
REFERENCE TO CERTAIN OBJECTS. 

63. Roads. Their direction, their nature (macadamized, corduroy, 
plank, dirt, etc.), their condition of repair, their grade, the nature of cross- 
roads, and the points where they leave the main roads ; their borders 
(woods, hedges, fences or ditches), the places at which they pass through 
defiles, cross heights or rivers, and where they intersect railroads, their 
breadth (whether suitable for column of fours or platoons, etc.). 

64. Railroads. Their direction, gauge, the number of tracks, stations 
and junctions, their grade, the length and height of the cuts, embankments 
and tunnels. 

65. Bridges. Their position, their width and length, their construction 
(trestle, girder, etc.), material (wood, brick, stone or iron), the roads and 
approaches on each bank. 

66. Rivers and Other Streams. Their direction, width and depth, the 
rapidity of the current, liability to sudden rises and the highest and low- 
est points reached by the water, as indicated by drift wood, etc., fords, the 
nature of the banks, kinds, position and number of islands at suitable 
points of passage, heights in the vicinity and their command over the 
banks. 

67. Woods. Their situation, extent and shape; whether clear or con- 



60 CHAPTER IV. 

taining underbrush ; the number and extent of "clearings" (open spaces) ; 
whether cut up by ravines or containing marshes, etc. ; nature of roads 
passing through them. 

68. Canals. Their direction, width and depth; condition of towpaths ; 
locks and means of protecting or destroying them. 

69. Telegraphs. Whether they follow railroads or common roads; sta- 
tions, number of wires. 

70. Villages. Their situation (on a height, in a valley or on a plain) ; 
nature of the surrounding country; construction of the houses, nature 
(straight or crooked) and width of streets; means of defense. 

71. Defiles. Their direction; whether straight or crooked; whether 
heights on either side are accessible or inaccessible ; nature of ground at 
each extremity; width (frontage of column that can pass through). 

72. Ponds and Marshes. Means of crossing; defensive use that might 
be made of them as obstacles against enemy ; whether the marshy grounds 
are practicable for any or all arms. 

73. Springs and Rivulets. Nature of approaches ; whether water is 
drinkable and abundant. 

74. Valleys. Extent and nature ; towns, villages, hamlets, streams, roads 
and paths therein ; obstacles offered by or in the valley, to the movement 
of troops. 

75. Heights. Whether slopes are. easy or steep; whether good defensive 
positions are offered; whether plateau is wide or narrow; whether pas- 
sages are easy or difficult; whether the ground is broken or smooth, 
wooded or clear. 

SUGGESTIONS FOR PATROLS EMPLOYED IN EXECUTING 

DEMOLITION. 

(Destruction or blocking of bridges, railroads, etc.) 

76. Patrols never execute any demolition unless specifically or- 
dered to do so. Demolition may be of two different characters : Temporary 
demolition, such as cutting telegraph wires in but a few places or merely 
burning the flooring of bridges, removing a few rails from a track, etc., 
and permanent demolition, such as cutting down an entire telegraph line, 
completely destroying bridges, blowing in tunnels, etc. Only temporary 
demolition will be dealt with in this book. 

77. Telegraph Line. To temporarily disable telegraph lines, connect 
up different wires close to the glass insulators, wrap a wire around all 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 61 

the wires and bury its ends in the ground (this grounds or short circuits 
the wire), or cut all the wires in one or two places. 

78. Railroads. To temporarily disable railroads remove the fish plates 
(the plates that join the rails together at the ends) at each end of a short 
section of track, preferable upon an embankment, then have as many men 
as available raise the track on one side until the ties stand on end and turn 
the section of track so that it will fall down the embankment ; or, cut out 
rails by a charge of dynamite or gun cotton placed against the web and 
covered up with mud or damp clay. . Eight to twelve ounces of explosive 
is sufficient. Or blow in the sides of deep cuts or blow down embank- 
ments. Bridges, culverts, tunnels, etc., are never destroyed except on a 
written order of the commander-in-chief. 

79. Wagon Roads — (a) Bridges can be rendered temporarily useless 
by removing the flooring, or, in the case of steel bridges, by burning the 
flooring (if obtainable, pour tar or kerosene on flooring), particularly if 
there is not time to remove it. 

Short culverts may sometimes be blown in. 

A hastily constructed barricade across a bridge or in a cut of trees, wagons, 
etc., may be sufficient in some cases where only the temporary check of 
hostile cavalry or artillery is desired. 

(b) The road bed may be blocked by digging trenches not less than 
thirty feet wide and six feet deep, but as this would take a great deal of 
time patrols would rarely be charged with such work. 

80. Report on Return of Patrol. On returning the patrol leaders 
should make a short verbal or written report, almost always the former, 
briefly recounting the movements ot the patrol, the information obtained 
of the enemy, a description of the country passed over and of friendly 
troops encountered. Of course, this is not practicable when the situation 
is changing rapidly and a returning patrol is immediately engaged in some 
new and pressing duty. 

MODEL REPORTS OF PATROL LEADERS. 

1. Verbal. 

Patrol Leader (Corporal B) : Sir, Corporal B reports back with his 
patrol. 

Captain -A: I received two messages from you, Corporal. What else 
did you discover? 

Corporal B; That was a regiment of infantry, sir, with one battalion 



62 CHAPTER IV. 

thrown out as advance guard. The main body of two battalions went into 
bivouac at the cross roads and the advance guard formed an outpost line 
along the big creek two miles south of here. 

Captain A: Give me an account of your movements. 

Corporal B: We followed this main road south to the creek, where we 
avoided a mounted patrol moving north on the road at 1-45 P. M., and 
then reconnoitered the valley from a ridge west of the road. We followed 
the ridge south for half a mile to a point where we could see a road 
crossing the valley and the main road at right angles, three miles south of 
here. There we halted, and at 2-20 what 'seemed to be the point and ad- 
vance party (about forty men) of an infantry advance guard appeared, 
marching north up this road, the head at the cross road. I then sent you 
message No. 1 by Private Brown. 

In fifteen minutes three companies had appeared 600 yards in rear of 
the advance party, and I could see a heavy, low column of dust about one- 
half mile further to the rear. Message No. 2 was then sent in by Privates 
Baker and Johnson, and to avoid several hostile patrols, I drew off further 
to the northwest. 

The advance guard then halted and established an outpost line along 
and south of the creek, two miles from here. The cloud of dust proved 
to be two more battalions and a wagon train. These two battalions went 
into bivouac on opposite sides of this road at the cross roads and sent out 
strong patrols east and west on the cross road. Five wagons went for- 
ward to the outpost battalion and the reserve built cook fires. 

As Private Rush, here, was the only man I had left, we started back, 
sketching the valley, ridge and positions of the main body and outpost. 
Here is the sketch, sir. The fields are all cut crops or meadow. 

We sighted two foot patrols from the outpost, moving north about a 
mile from here, one following the road and one further east. 

I did not see any of our patrols. 

That is all, sir. 

2. Written. 

Report of Sergeant Wm. James' Patrol of Five Men. 

Support No. 1, 
Outpost of 6th Inf., Near Dixon, 

22 Aug. 12, 2-30 to 5 P. M. 
The patrol followed the timber along the creek for one mile S. from 
our outguards and leaving the creek bottom moved l / 2 mile S. E. to the 
wooded hill (about 800 ft. high), visible from our lines. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 63 

From this hill top the valley to the east (about one mile wide) could be 
fairly well observed. No signs of the enemy were seen and a message, 
No. 1, was sent back by Pvt. Russell. 

A wagon road runs N. and S. through the valley, bordered by four or 
five farms with numerous orchards and cleared fields. Both slopes of the 
valley are heavily wooded. 

The patrol then moved S. W., until it struck the macadam pike which 
runs N. and S., through our lines. Proceeding S. 400 yds. on this pike to a 
low hill a farmer, on foot, was met. Said he lived one mile further S. ; was 
looking for some loose horses; that four hostile cavalrymen, from the 
east, stopped at his farm at noon, drank some milk, took oats for their 
horses, inquired the way to Dixon and rode off in that direction within 
fifteen minutes. He said they were the first hostiles he had seen ; that they 
told nothing about themselves, and they and their horses looked in good 
condition. Farmer appeared friendly and honest. 

The patrol then returned to our lines following the pike about two miles. 
Road is in good condition, low hedges and barbed wire fences, stone cul- 
verts and no bridges in the two miles. Bordering country is open and 
gently rolling farming country and all crops are in. A sketch is attached 
to this report. None of our patrols was seen. 
Respectfully submitted, 

Wm. James, 
Sergeant, Co. A, 6th Infy. 

PROBLEMS IN PATROL LEADING AND PATROLLING. 

In studying or solving tactical problems on a map you must remember 
that unless you carefully work out your own solution to the problem be- 
fore looking at the given solution, you will practically make no progress. 

It is best, if your time permits, to write out your solutions, and when 
you read over the given solutions, compare the solution, of each point with 
what you thought of that same point when you were solving the problem, 
and consider why you did just what you did. Without this comparison 
much of the lasting benefit of the work is lost. 

In some of these problems both the problem and solutions are presented 
in dialogue form so as to give company officers examples of the best 
method of conducting the indoor instruction of their men in minor tactics. 
It also gives an example of how to conduct a tactical walk out in the 
country, simply looking at the ground itself, instead of a map hanging on 



64 CHAPTER IV. 

the wall. The enlarged Elementary Map described at the top of page 
36, is supposed to be used in this instruction as well as in the war games. 

Problem No. 1 (Infantry). 

The Elementary Map (scale 12 inches to the mile) being hung on the 
wall, about two sergeants and two squads of the company are seated in a 
semicircle facing it, and the captain is standing beside the map with a 
pointer (a barrack cleaning rod makes an excellent pointer). 

Captain: We will suppose that our company has just reached the vil- 
lage of York. The enemy is reported to be in the vicinity of Boling and 
Oxford (he points out on the map all places as they are mentioned). We 
are in the enemy's country. 

Corporal James, I call you up at 3 P. M. and give you these orders : 
"Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest troops are three 
miles south of here. Take four men from your squad and reconnoiter 
along this road (County Road) into the valley on the other side of that 
ridge over there (points to the ridge just beyond the cemetery), and see 
if you can discover anything about the enemy. Report back here by five 
o'clock. I am sending a patrol out the Valley Pike." Now, Corporal, state 
just what you would do. 

Corporal James: I would go to my squad, fall in Privates Amos, Barlow, 
Sharp and Brown; see that they had full canteens; that their arms were all 
right ; that they were not lame or sick and I would have them leave their 
blanket rolls, haversacks and entrenching tools with the company. (Par. 
34, p. 44.) 

I would then give these orders (Par. 33, p. 43) : "We are ordered out on 
patrol duty. Nothing has been seen of the enemy yet. Our nearest troops are 
three miles south of here. We are ordered to reconnoiter along this road 
into the valley on the other side of that ridge, and see if we can discover 
anything about the enemy. Another patrol is going up the Valley Pike. 
Reports are to be sent here. In case we are scattered we will meet at that 
woods on the hill over there (indicates the clump of trees just west of 
Mills' farm). 

I will go ahead. Amos, follow about fifty yards behind me. Barlow, you 
and Sharp keep about 100 yards behind Amos, and Brown will follow you 
at half that distance. All keep on the opposite side of the road from 
the man ahead of you." (Par. 37, p. 45.) 

Captain: All right, Corporal, now describe what route you will follow. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 65 

Corporal James: The patrol will keep to the County Road until the 
crest of the ridge near the stone wall is reached, when what I see in the 
valley beyond will decide my route for me. 

Captain: How about the woods west of the stone wall? 

Corporal James: If I did not see anyone from our patrol on the Valley 
Pike reconnoitering there, I would give Barlow these orders just after we 
had examined the cemetery, when the patrol would have temporarily closed 
up somewhat: "Barlow, take Sharp and examine that little woods over 
there. Join us at the top of this hill." I would then wave to Brown to 
close up and would proceed to the hill top. 

Captain: Barlow, what do you do? 

Private Barlow: I would say, "Sharp, cut straight across for that woods. 
I will follow you." T would follow about 100 yards behind him. When he 
reached the edge of the woods I would signal him to halt by holding up 
my left hand. After I had closed up to about 50 yards I would say to him, 
"Go into the woods and keep me in sight." I would walk along the edge 
of the woods where I could see Sharp and the corporal's patrol on the road 
at the same time. 

Captain: That is all right, Barlow. Corporal, you should have instructed 
Amos or Brown to keep a close watch on Barlow for signals. 

Corporal James: I intended to watch him myself. 

Captain: No, you would have enough to do keeping on the alert for what 
was ahead of you. Now describe how you lead the patrol to the top of the 
hill, by the stone wall 

Corporal James: When I reached the crest I would hold up my hand for 
the patrol to halt and would cautiously advance and look ahead into the 
valley If I saw nothing suspicious I would wave to the men to close up 
and say, "Amos, go to that high ground about 250 yards over there (indi- 
cates the end of the nose made by the 60-foot contour just north of the 
east end of the stone wall), and look around the country." I would keep 
Brown behind the crest, watching Barlow's movements. 

Captain: Now, Corporal, Amos reaches the point you indicated and Bar- 
low and Sharp join you. What do you do? 

Corporal James: Can I see the Steel Bridge over Sandy Creek? 

Captain: No, it is 24 of a mile away and the trees along the road by 
Smith's hide it. You can see the cut in the road east of the bridge and the 
Smith house, but the cross roads are hidden by the trees bordering the 
roads. You see nothing suspicious. It is a clear, sunny afternoon. The 
roads are dusty and the trees in full foliage. The valley is principally 
made up of fields of cut hay, corn stubble and meadow land. 



66 CHAPTER IV. 

Corporal James: Does Private Amos give me any information? 

Captain: No, he makes you no signals. You see him sitting behind a 
bush looking northwest, down the valley. 

Corporal James: I would say, "Barlow, head straight across to where 
that line of trees meets the road (indicates the point where the lane from 
Mills' farm joins the Chester Pike). Sharp keep about 50 yards to my 
right rear." I would follow. Barlow at 150 yards and when I had reached 
the bottom land I would wave to Amos to follow us. 

Captain: How about Brown? 

Corporal James: I had already given him his orders to follow as rear 
guard and he should do so without my telling him. 

Captain: Amos, what do you do when you see the corporal wave to you? 

Private Amos: I would go down the hill and join him. 

Captain: No, you could do better than that. You are too far from the 
corporal for him to signal you to do much of anything except stay there 
or join him. You should join him, but you should not go straight down 
to him. You should head so as to strike the Mills' Lane about 100 yards 
east of the house and then go down the lane, first looking along the stone 
wall. In this way you save time in reconnoitering the ground near the 
Mills' farm and protect the patrol against being surprised by an enemy 
hidden by the line of trees, or the wall along the lane. You are not dis- 
obeying your orders but just using common sense in following them out 
and thinking about what the corporal is trying to do. 

Now, Corporal, why didn't you go to the Smith house and find out if 
the people there had seen anything of the enemy? 

Corporal James: You said we were in the enemy's country, sir, so I 
thought it best to avoid the inhabitants until I found I could not get in- 
formation in any other way. I intended first to see if I could locate any 
enemy around here, and if not, to stop at houses on my return. In this 
way I would be gone before the people could send any information to the 
enemy about my patrol. 

Captain: Barlow reaches the Chester Pike where the Mills' lane leaves 
it. You are about 150 yards in his rear. Sharp is 50 yards off to your 
right rear, Amos 100 yards to your left rear and Brown 50 yards behind 
you. Just as Barlow starts to climb over the barbed wire fence into the 
Chester Pike you see him drop down on the ground. He signals, "Enemy 
in sight." Tell me quickly what would you do? 

Corporal James: I would wave my hand for all to lie down, and I would 
hasten forward, stooping over as I ran, until I was about 20 yards from 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 67 

him, when 1 would crawl forward to the fence, close by him. Just before 
I reached him I would ask him what he saw. 

Captain: He replies, "There are some hostile foot soldiers coming up 
this road." 

Corporal James: I would crawl forward and look. 

Captain: You see three or four men, about 500 yards north of you, com- 
ing up the Chester Pike. They are scattered out. 

Corporal James: I would say, "Crawl into the lane, keep behind the 
stone wall, watch those fellows, and work your way to that farm" (indi- 
cates the Mills' farm). I would start towards the Mills' farm myself, 
under cover of the trees along the lane and would wave to the other men 
to move rapidly west, towards the hills. 

Captain: Why didn't you try to hide near where you were and allow the 
hostile men to pass? 

Corporal James: There does not seem to be any place to hide near there 
that a patrol would not probably examine. 

Captain: What is your plan now? 

Corporal James: I want to get my patrol up to that small woods near the 
Mills' farm, but I hardly expect to be able to get them up to that point 
without their being seen. In any event, I want them well back from the 
road where they can lie down and not be seen by the enemy when he 
passes. 

Captain: You succeed in collecting your patrol in the woods without 
their being seen, and you see four foot soldiers in the road at the entrance 
to the land. One man starts up the lane, the others remaining on the road. 

Corporal James: I say, "Brown, go through these woods and hurry 
straight across to York. You should be able to see the village from the 
other side of the woods. Report to the captain that a hostile patrol of 
four foot men is working south up the valley, two miles northeast of York. 
We will go further north. Repeat what I have told you." (Par. 44, p. 48.) 

Captain: Why didn't you send this message before? 

Corporal James: Because we were moving in the same direction that the 
messenger would have had to go, and, by waiting a very few minutes, I 
was able to tell whether it was a mere patrol or the point of an advance 
guard. 

Captain: Do you think it correct to send a messenger back with news 
about a small patrol? 

Corporal James: Ordinarily it would be wrong, but as nothing has been 
seen of the enemy until now, this first news is important because it proves 



68 CHAPTER IV. 

to the Captain that the. enemy really is in this neighborhood, which it 
seems to me is a very important thing for him to know and what my mis- 
sion required me to do. (Par. 45, p. 52.) 

Captain-' What are you going to do now, Corporal? 

Corporal James: We have traveled about two miles and stopped fre- 
quently, so it must be about four o'clock. It is V/z miles back to York, 
where I should arrive about 5 o'clock. It would take me 25 minutes to go 
from here to York, so I have about 35 minutes left before 5 o'clock. This 
will permit me to go forward another mile and still be able to reach York 
on time. In is ^ of a mile to the Mason farm, and if the hostile patrol 
appears to be going on, I will start for that point. Did anyone at the 
Mills' farm see us? 

Captain: No, but tell me first why you do not go along this high ground 
that overlooks the valley? 

Corporal James: Because our patrol that started out the Valley Pike is 
probably near Twin Hills and I want to cover other country. The orchard 
at Mason's would obstruct my view from the hills. 

Captain: The hostile patrol goes on south. Describe briefly your next 
movements. 

Corporal James-' I lead my patrol over to Mason's and, concealing two 
of the men so that both roads and the house can be watched, I take one 
man and reconnoiter around the farm yard and go up to the house to 
question the inhabitants. (Par. 61, p. 58.) 

Captain' You find one woman there who says some other soldiers, on 
foot, passed there a few minutes ago, marching south. She gives you no 
other information about the enemy or country. 

Corporal James: I would send Amos over to see how deep and wide 
Sandy Creek is (Par. 66, p. 59). When he returned I would take the 
patrol over to Twin Hills, follow the ridge south to the stone wall on the 
County Road, watching the valley for signs of the hostile patrol, (and fol- 
low the road back to York; then make my report to the Captain, telling 
him where I had gone, all I had seen, including a description of the coun- 
try. If I had not been hurried, I would have made a sketch of the valley. 
I can make a rough one after I get in. (Par. 80, p. 61.) 

Captain: Suppose on your way back you saw hostile troops appearing on 
the County Road, marching west over Sandy Ridge. Would you stay out 
longer or would you consider that you should reach Oxford by 5 o'clock? 

Corporal James: I would send a message back at once, and remain out 
long enough to find out the strength and probable intention of the new 
enemy. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 69 

Problem No. 2 (Cavalry). 

Captain (to one platoon of his troop of cavalry): We will suppose that 
this troop has just (9 A. M.) arrived in Boling (Elementary Map) on a 
clear, dry, summer day. The enemy is supposed to be near Salem and we 
have seen several of his patrols this morning on out march south to Bol- 
ing. Sergeant Allen, I call you up and give you these instructions : "Take 
Corporal Burt's squad (8 men) and reconnoiter south by this road (indi- 
cates the Boling-Morey house road) to Salem. I will take the troop 
straight south to Salem and you will join it there about 10:15. It is 4 l A 
miles to Salem. Start at once." (You have no map.) 

Sergeant Allen- I would like to know just what the Captain wishes my 
patrol to do. (Par. 35, p. 44.) 

Captain: We will suppose that this is one of the many occasions in ac- 
tual campaign where things must be done quickly. Where there is no time 
for detailed orders. You know that the troop has been marching south 
towards Salem where the enemy is supposed to be. You also know we 
have seen several of his patrols. I have told you what the troop is going 
to Jo, and from all this you should be able to decide what your mission is 
in this case. We will, therefore, consider that there is no time to give you 
more detailed orders, and you have to decide for yourself. Of course, if 
you had failed to hear just what I said, then, in spite of the necessity for 
haste, I would repeat my instructions to you. (Par. 33-b, p. 43.) 

Sergeant Allen: I would ride over to Corporal Burt's squad and lead it 
out of the column to the road leading to the Morey house, and say, "The 
troop is going on straight south to Salem, A l / 2 miles away. This squad will 
reconnoiter south to Salem by this road, joining the troop there about 
10:15. In case we become separated, make for Salem. Corporal, take 
Brown and form the point. I will follow with the squad about 300 yards in 
rear. Regulate your gait on me after you get your distance. Move out 
now at a trot." (Par. 33-a, p. 43.) 

After Corporal Burt had gotten 150 yards out I would say, "Carter, 
move out as connecting file." I would then say, "Downs, you will follow 
about 150 yards behind us as rear guard." When Carter had gone i50 
yards down the road I would order, "1. Forward; 2. Trot; 3. MARCH," 
and ride off at the head of the four remaining men (in column of 
twos). (Par. 37, p. 45.) 

Captain-: Sergeant, tell me briefly what is your estimate of the situation 
— that is, what sort of a proposition you have before you and how you 
have decided to handle it. 



70 CHAPTER IV. 

Sergeant Allen: As the enemy is supposed to be near Salem and we have 
already seen his patrols, 1 expect to encounter more patrols and may meet 
a strong body of the enemy, on my way to Salem. As I have no map, 1 
.cannot tell anything about the road, except that it is about 4^ miles by the 
direct road the troop will follow, therefore my route will be somewhat 
longer. I have been given an hour and fifteen minutes in which to make 
the trip, so, if I move at a trot along the safer portions of the road, I will 
have time to proceed very slowly and cautiously along the dangerous por- 
tions. My patrol will be stretched out about 500 yards on the road, which 
should make it difficult for the enemy to surprise us and yet should per- 
mit my controlling the movements of the men. (Par. 37, p. 45.) 

1 consider that my mission is to startjfeut on this road and find my way 
around to Salem in about an hour and, particularly, to get word across to 
the Captain on the other road of anything of importance about the enemy 
that I may learn. 

Captain: Very well. When you reach the cut in the road across the 
south nose of Hill 38, your point has almost reached the Morey house. 
Do you make any change in your patrol? 

Sergeant Allen: I order, "1. Walk; 2. MARCH," and watch to see if 
the connecting file observes the change of gait and comes to a walk. 

Captain: Suppose he does not come to a walk? 

Sergeant Allen: I would say, "Smith, gallop ahead and tell Carter to 
walk and to keep more on the alert." 

Captain : Corporal Burt, you reach the road fork at Morey's. What do 
you do? 

Corporal Burt: I say, "Brown, wait here until Carter is close enough to 
see which way you go and then trot up to me." I would walk on down 
the road. 

Captain: Wouldn't you make any inspection of the Morey house? ^ 

Corporal Burt: Not unless I saw something suspicious from the road. 
I would expect the main body of the patrol to do that. 

Captain: Don't you make any change on account of the woods you are 
passing? 

Corporal Burt: No, sir. It has very heavy underbrush and we would 
lose valuable time trying to search through it. A large force of the enemy 
would hardly hide in such a place. 

Captain: Sergeant Allen, you reach the road fork. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I would have two men go into the Morey house to ques- 
tion anyone they found there. I would order one of the other two men 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 71 

to trot up (north) that road 200 yards and wait until I signaled to him to 
return. With the other man I would await the result of the inspection of 
the Morey house. Corporal Burt should have gone ahead without orders 
to the cut in the road across Long Ridge, leaving Brown half way between 
us. (Par. 54, p. 57; Par. 61, p. 58.) 

Captain : You find no one at the Morey house. 

Sergeant Allen: I would signal the man to the north to come in. I 
would then order two men to "find a gate in the fence and trot up on that 
hill (indicating Long Ridge), and look around the country and join me 
down this road" (Par. 37, p. 45). I would then start south at a walk, 
halting at the cut to await the result of the inspection of the country from 
the hill. 

Captain: Foster, you and Lacey are the two men sent up on Long Ridge. 
When you reach the hill top you see four hostile cavalrymen trotting north 
an the Valley Pike, across the railroad track. 

Private Foster: I signal like this (enemy in sight), and wait to see if 
they go on north (Par. 43, p. 48). Do I see anything else behind or 
ahead of them? 

Captain: You see no other signs of the enemy on any road. Everything 
looks quiet. The hostile cavalrymen pass the Baker house and continue 
north. 

Private Foster: I would then take Lacey, trot down the ridge to Ser- 
geant Allen, keeping below the crest and report, "Sergeant, we saw four 
hostile mounted men trotting north on the road about three-quarters of 
a mile over there (pointing), and they kept on north, across that road 
(pointing to the Brown-Baker-Oxford road). There was nothing else in 
sight." I would then tell him what the country to the south looked like, 
if he wanted to know. 

Captain: Sergeant Allen, what do you do now? 

Sergeant Allen: I would continue toward the Brown house at a trot. I 
would send no message to you as you already know there are hostile pa- 
trols about and therefore this information would be of little or no im- 
portance to you. (Par. 45, p. 52.) 

Captain: You arrive at Brown's house. 

Sergeant Allen: I would send two men in to question the people and I 
would continue on at a walk. I would not send any one up the road to- 
wards Oxford as Foster has already seen that road. 

Captain: You should have sent a man several hundred yards out the 
Farm Lane (Par. 54, p. 57). If he moved at a trot it would only have 
taken a very short time. Continue to describe your movements. 



72 CHAPTER IV. 

Sergeant Allen: I would halt at the railroad track until I saw my two men 
coming on from the Brown house. I would then direct the other two men 
who were with me to go through the first opening in the fence to the west 
and ride south along that ridge (62 — Lone Hill — Twin Hills ridge) until 
I signaled them to rejoin. I would tell them to look out for our troop 
over to the east. If there were a great many fences I would not send them 
out until we were opposite the southern edge of that woods ahead of us 
There I would send them to the high ground to look over the country 
and return at once. 

Captain: There are a great many fences west of the road and practically 
none east of the road to Sandy Creek. Just as you arrive opposite the 
southern edge of those woods and are giving orders for the two men to 
ride up the hill, you hear firing in the direction of Bald Knob. In the road 
at the foot of the south slope of Bald Knob, where the trail to the quarry 
starts off, you can see quite a clump of horses. You see nothing to the 
west of your position or towards Mason's. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I signal "RALLY" to Carter and Downs. If there is a 
gate nearby I lead my men through it. If not, I have them cut or break 
an opening in the fence and ride towards the railroad fill at a .fast trot, 
having one man gallop ahead as point. 

When we reach the fill, the point having first looked beyond it, I order, 
"DISMOUNT. Lacey, hold the horses. 1. As skirmishers along 
that fiu,, 2. MARCH." When Corporal Burt, Brown, Carter and 
Downs come up Lacey takes their horses and they join the line of 
skirmishers. Captain, what do I see from the fill? 

Captain: There appear to be about twenty or thirty horses in the group 
The firing seems to come from the cut in the road just north of the horses 
and from the clump of trees by the Quarry. You can also hear firing from 
a point further north on the road, apparently your troop replying to the 
fire from Bald Knob. You see nothing in the road south of the horses 
as far as Hill 42, which obstructs your view. What action do you take? 

Sergeant Allen: I order, "AT THE FEET OF THOSE HORSES. 
RANGE, 850. CLIP FIRING." 

Captain: What is your object in doing as you have done? 

Sergeant Allen: I know the Captain intended to go to Salem with the 
troop. From the fact that he is replying to the hostile fire I judge he still 
wishes to push south. I was ordered to reconnoiter along this road, but 
now a situation has arisen where the troop is being prevented or delayed 
in doing what was desired and I am in what appears to be a very favorable 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 73 

position from which to give assistance to the troop and enable them to push 
ahead. I am practically in rear of the enemy and within effective range 
of their lead horses. I therefore think my mission has at least temporarily 
changed and I should try and cause the twenty or thirty hostile troopers 
to draw off. (Par. 31-b, p. 42.) Besides, I think it is my business to find 
out what the strength of this enemy is and whether or not he has rein- 
forcements coming up from Salem, and send this information to the Cap- 
tain. From my position I can still watch the Chester Pike. 

Captain: After you have emptied your clips you see the enemy running 
down out of the cut and from among the trees mount their horses and 
gallop south. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I would send Foster across the creek above the trestle 
(south of trestle), to ride across to that road (pointing towards the cut 
on Bald Hill) and tell the Captain, who is near there, that about thirty 
men were on the hill and they have galloped south, and that I am con- 
tinuing towards Salem. I would have Foster repeat the message that I 
gave him. I would then trot back to the Chester Pike and south to Ma- 
son's, taking up our old formation. 

Captain: You see nothing unusual at Mason's and continue south until 
you reach the cross roads by the Smith farm. Corporal Burt and Private 
Brown are near the stone bridge south of Smith's; Private Carter is half 
way between you and Corporal Burt; and Private Downs is 100 yards 
north of Smith's. You have three men with you. What do you do? 

Sergean Allen'- What time is it now? 

Captain: It is now 10:45 A. M. 

Sergeant Allen: I would say, "Lacey, take Jackson and gallop as far 
as that cut in the road (points east) and see if you can locate the enemy 
or our troop in the valley beyond. I will wave my hat over my head when 
I want you to return." I would then say to Private Moore, "Gallop down 
to Corporal Burt and tell him to fall back in this direction 100 yards, and 
then you return here bringing the other two men with you." I would then 
await the result of Private Lacey's reconnaissance, sending Carter to the 
turn in the road 200 yards west of the cross rOads. 

Captain: Lacey, what do you do? 

Private Lacey'- I order Jackson, "Follow 75 yards behind me and watcJi 
for signals from Sergeant Allen/' and I then gallop across the steel bridge 
and half way up the hill. I then move cautiously up to the cut and, if the 
fences permit, I ride up .on the side of the cut, dismounting just before 
reaching the crest of the ridge, and walk forward until I can see into the 
valley beyond. 



74 CHAPTER IV. 

Captain: You see no signs of the enemy in the valley, but you see your 
own troop on the road by the Gibbs farm with a squad in advance in the 
road on Hill 42. 

Private Laccy: I look towards Sergeant Allen to see if he is signaling. 
I make no signals. 

Captain: What do you do, Sergeant? 

Sergeant Allen: I wave my hat for Private Lacey to return. I wave 
to Private Downs to join me and when Private Lacey arrives I signal 
"ASSEMBLE" to Corporal Burt and then say, "Lacey, join Corporal Burt 
and tell him to follow me as rear guard. Martin, join Carter and tell him 
to trot west. We will follow. You stay with him." After he got started 
I would order, "Follow me. 1. Trot; 2. MARCH." 

Captain: When Private Carter reaches the crest of the ridge about one- 
half mile west of Smith's he signals, "Enemy in sight in large numbers." 
and he remains in the road with Martin 50 yards in rear. (Par. 43, p. .) 

Sergeant Allen: I order, "1. Wai,k; 2. MARCH. 1. Squad; 2. 
HALT," and gallop up to Private Carter, dismount just before reaching 
the crest, give my horse to Private Martin, and run forward. 

Captain: Carter points out what appears to be a troop of cavalry stand- 
ing in the road leading north out of York, just on the edge of the town. 
You see about four mounted men 200 yards out of York on your road, 
halted, and about the same number on the Valley Pike near where it 
crosses the first stream north of York. What do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I wait about three minutes to see if they are going to 
move. 

Captain: They remain halted. The men at York appear to be dis- 
mounted. 

Sergeant Allen: I write the following message: 

Hill Y 2 mile N. E. of York, 

10 A. M. 
Captain X : 

A hostile troop of cavalry is standing in road at YORK (west of SA- 
LEM ) with squads halted on N. and N. E. roads from YORK." Nothing 
else seen. Will remain in observation for the present. 

Allen, 
Sgt. (Pars. 44 and 45, pp. 48 and 52.) 

I would give the message to Martin, who had previously brought my 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 75 

horse up close in rear of the crest, and would say to him, "Take this mes- 
sage to the Captain, straight across to the road the troop is on, and turn 
south towards Salem if you do not see them at first. Take Lacey with 
you. Tell him what you have seen. He knows where the troop is." 1 
would have Carter hold my horse, and watch the remainder of the patrol 
for signals, while I observed the enemy. 

Captain: At the end of five minutes the hostile troop trots north on the 
Valley Pike, the patrol on your road rides across to the Valley Pike and 
follows the troop. 

Sergeant Allen: I would wait until the troops had crossed the creek 
north of York and would then face my patrol east and trot to the cross 
roads at Smith's, turn south and continue to Salem, sending one man to 
ride up on Sandy Ridge, keeping the patrol in sight. 

Captain: We have carried out the problem far enough. It furnishes a 
good example of the varying situations a patrol leader has to meet. Good 
judgment or common sense must be used in deciding on the proper course 
to follow. You must always think of what your chief is trying to do and 
then act in the way you think will best help him to accomplish his object. 
If you have carefully decided just what mission you have been given to 
accomplish, you cannot easily go wrong. In handling a mounted patrol you 
must remember that if the men become widely separated in strange coun- 
try, or even in country they are fairly familiar with, they are most apt to 
lose all contact with each other or become lost themselves. 

Problem No. 3 (Infantry). 

Captain {to one platoon of his company): We will suppose it is about 
half an hour before dawn. One platoon of the company is deployed as 
skirmishers, facing north, in the cut where the County Road crosses Sandy 
Ridge. It is the extreme right of a line of battle extending west along 
the line of the County Road. The fight has not commenced. This platoon 
is resting in a wheat field between the railroad and the foot of the slope 
of Sandy Ridge, 200 yards south of the County Roafi. Sergeant Allen, I 
call you up and give you these instructions : "The enemy's line is off in 
that direction (pointing northwest). Take six men and work north along 
the railroad until it is light enough to see ; then locate the hostile line and 
keep me informed of their movements. I will be in this vicinity. You 
have a compass. Start at once." Describe briefly the formation of your 
patrol while it is moving in the dark. 



76 CHAPTER IV. 

Sergeant Allen: One man will lead. A second man will follow about 15 
yards in rear of him. I will follow the second man at the same distance 
with three more men, and the last man will be about 20 yards in rear of 
me. All will have bayonets fixed, loaded and pieces locked. One short, 
low whistle will mean, "Halt," two short whistles will mean, "Forward," 
and the word "Sandy" will be the countersign by which we can identify 
each other. 

Captain: Very well. We will suppose that you reach the steel trestle 
over Sandy Creek just at dawn and have met no opposition and heard 
nothing of the enemy. On either side of Sandy Creek are fields of stand- 
ing corn about six feet tall. In the present dim light you can only see a 
few hundred yards off. 

Sergeant Allen: The patrol being halted I would walk forward to the 
leading man (Brown) and say, "Brown, take Carter and form the point 
for the patrol, continuing along this railroad. We will follow about 150 
yards in rear." I would then rejoin the main body of the patrol and order 
the man in rear to follow about 75 yards in rear of us. When the point 
had gained its distance I would move forward with the main body, order- 
ing one man to move along the creek bank (west bank), keeping abreast of 
us until I signaled to him to come in. 

Captain: Just as you reach the northern end of the railroad fill your 
point halts and you detect some movement in the road to the west of you. 
It is rapidly growing lighter. 

Sergeant Allen: I would move the main body by the left flank into the 
corn, signaling to the man following the creek to rejoin, and for the rear 
guard to move off the track also. I would expect Brown to do the same, 
even before he saw what we had done. I would then close up on the point 
until I could see it and, halting all the patrol, I. would order Foster to take 
Lacey and work over towards the road to see what is there and to report 
back to me immediately. 

Captain: In a few minutes Foster returns and reports, "The enemy is 
moving south in the road and in the field beyond, in line of squads or sec- 
tions. A hostile patrol is moving southeast across the field behind us. We 
were not seen." 

(Note: This situation could well have been led up to by requiring Pri- 
vate Foster to explain how he conducted his reconnaissance and having 
him formulate his report on the situation as given.) 

Sergeant Allen-' J would then work my patrol closer to the road, keep- 
ing Foster out on that flank, and prepare to follow south in rear of the 
hostile movement. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 77 

Captain: The information you have gained is so important that you 
should have sent a man back to me with a verbal message, particularly as 
you are in a very dangerous position, and may not be able to send a mes- 
sage later. While you have not definitely located the left of the enemy's 
line, you have apparently discovered what appears to be a movement of 
troops forward to form the left of the attacking line. Your action in 
turning south to follow the troops just reported, is proper, as you now 
know you are partly in rear of the hostile movement and must go south to 
locate the hostile flank that your jnission requires you to report on. (Par. 
48, p. 54.) 

You men must picture in your minds the appearance of the country the 
Sergeant is operating through. His patrol is now in a field of high stand- 
ing corn. Unless you are looking down between the regular rows of corn 
you can only see a few yards ahead of you. The road has a wire fence 
and is bordered by a fairly heavy growth of high weeds and bushes. The 
ground is dry and dusty. Sergeant, how do you conduct your movement 
south ? 

Sergeant Allen: As my patrol is now in a very dangerous neighborhood 
and very liable to be caught between two hostile lines, with a deep creek 
between our present position and our platoon, I think it best to move cau- 
tiously southeast until I reach the creek bank (I cannot see it from where 
I now am), and then follow the creek south. I think I am very apt to find 
the enemy's left resting on this creek. Besides, if I do not soon locate the 
enemy, I can hold the main body of my patrol close to the creek and send 
scouts in towards the road to search for the enemy. It will also be much 
easier to send information back to the platoon from the creek bank, as a 
messenger can ford it and head southeast until he strikes the railroad and 
then follow that straight back to our starting point. It would thus be very 
difficult for him to get lost. 

Captain: You move southeast and strike the creek bank just south of 
the railroad trestle. You now hear artillery fire off to the west and rifle 
fire to the southwest which gradually increases in volume. You see a 
high cloud of dust hanging over the road on the hill west of Mason's and 
south of this road on the north slope of the northern-most knoll of the 
Twin Hills, you can occasionally see the flash of a gun, artillery, being 
discharged. There seems to be no rifle firing directly in your front. 

Sergeant Allen-' I hurriedly write the following message: 



78 CHAPTER IV. 

At Ry. trestle 1 mi. N. of Platoon, 

5.15 A. M. 
Captain X : 

Can see arty, firing from position on N. slope of knoll on high ridge to 
\Y. of me and % mi. S. of E. and W. road. Hostile line is S. of me. Have 
not located it. Will move S. 

Allen, 
Sgt. (Par. 44, p. 48.) 

I hand this to Private Smith and say to him, "Carry this quickly to the 
Captain. Follow the railroad back until you cross a wagon road. Our 
platoon should be to the west of the track just beyond the road." I also 
read the message to Smith and point out the hostile artillery. I have con- 
sidered that I sent a message before telling about the hostile advance. 

I then continue south, moving slowly and with great caution. I in- 
struct the remaining four men that in case we are surprised to try to 
cross the creek and follow the railroad back to the platoon. 

Captain: Your information about the hostile artillery position was im- 
portant and should have been sent in, provided you think your description 
of the hostile position was sufficiently clear to be understood by an ob- 
server within your own lines. 

There is some question as to the advisability of your remaining on the 
west bank of the creek. Still you would not be able to tell from where 
you were what direction the creek took, so you probably would remain on 
the west bank for the present. 

You continue south for about 150 yards and your leading man halts, 
comes back to you, arid reports that the corn ahead is broken and trampled, 
showing it has been passed over by foot troops. About the same time 
you hear rifle fire to your immediate front. It sounds very close. 

Sergeant Allen: I say, "Cross this creek at once," and when we reach the 
other bank and the patrol forms again, we move slowly south, all the men 
keeping away from the creek bank, except myself, and I march opposite 
the two men constituting the main body. 

Captain-' About this time you detect a movement in the corn across the 
creek in rear of the place you have just left. You think it is a body of 
troops moving south. The firing in front seems to be delivered from a 
point about two or three hundred yards south of you and you can hear 
heavy firing from off in the direction of your company, a few bullets pass- 
ing overhead. There are scattered trees along the creek and some bushes 
close to the edge. 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 79 

Sergeant Allen: I would conceal myself close to the bank, the patrol 
being back, out of sight from the opposite bank, and await developments. 

Captain: Sergeant, your patrol is in a dangerous position. The enemy 
will very likely have a patrol or detachment in rear and beyond his flank. 
This patrol would probably cross the railroad trestle and take you in rear. 
You should have given the last man in your patrol particular instructions 
to watch the railroad to the north. It would have been better if you had 
sent one man over to the railroad, which is only a short distance away, and 
had him look up and down the track and also make a hurried survey of the 
country from an elevated position on the fill. 

I also think it would be better not to await developments where you now 
are, but to push south and make sure of the position of the left of the 
enemy's firing line. Later you can devote more time to the movements in 
rear of the first line. You are taking. too many chances in remaining where 
you are. I do not mean that you should leave merely because you might 
have some of your men killed or captured, but because if this did occur 
you would probably not be able to accomplish your mission. Later you 
may have to run a big chance of sacrificing several of your men, in order 
to get the desired information, which would be entirely justifiable. Tell 
me how your men are arranged and what your next movement would be. 

Sergeant Allen: I have four men left. I am close to the stream's bank, 
under cover ; two men are about 25 yards further away from the stream ; 
Private Brown is up stream as far off as he can get and still see the other 
two men, and Private Foster is down stream the same distance. Both 
Brown and Foster are well back from the stream. The two men in the 
middle, the main body of the patrol, make their movements conform to 
mine, and Brown and Foster regulate their movements on the main body. 
I will move south until I can locate the enemy's advance line. 

Captain: When you are about opposite the Mason house, Brown comes 
back to you, having signaled halt, and reports he can see the enemy's firing 
line about 100 yards ahead on the other side of the stream, and that a 
small detachment is crossing the stream just beyond where he was. What 
do you do? 

Sergeant Allen: I creep forward with Brown to verify his report. The 
remainder of the patrol remains in place. 

Captain: You find everything as Brown reported. You see that the firing 
line extends along the southern edge of the cornfield, facing an unculti- 
vated field covered with grass and frequent patches of weeds two to three 
feet high. You cannot determine how strong the line is, but a heavy fire 



80 CHAPTER IV. 

is being delivered. You cannot see the detachment that crossed the creek 
south of you because of the standing corn. 

Sergeant Allen: I crawl back to the main body, leaving Brown, and 
write the following message : 

, 5/6 mi. N. of Platoon, 

5:32 A. M. 
Captain X : 

Enemy's left rests on creek 24 mile to your front, along S. edge of corn- 
field. Creek is 5 ft. deep by 60 ft. wide. Hostile patrols have crossed 
creek. Will watch their rear. 

Allen, 

Sgt. 

I give this to Private James and say, "Go over to the railroad (point- 
ing), then turn to your right and follow the track until you cross a wagon 
road. Our platoon is just beyond that, on this side of the track. Give this 
message to the Captain. Hurry." 

Captain: You should have either read the message to James or had him 
read it. You should also have cautioned him to watch out for that hostile 
detachment. It might be better to send another man off with a duplicate 
of the message, as there is quite a chance that James may not get through 
and the message is all-important. James, you get back to the wagon road 
here (pointing) and find yourself in the right of your battle line, but can 
not locate me or the company right away. 

Private James: I would show the note to the first officer I saw in any 
event, and in this case, I would turn it over to the officer who appeared 
to be in command of the battalion or regiment on the right of the line, 
telling him what company the patrol belonged to, when we went out, etc. 

Captain: What do you do, Sergeant? 

Sergeant Allen: I start to move north a short distance in order to find 
out what reinforcements are in rear of the hostile line. 

Captain : After you have moved about 75 yards you are suddenly fired 
into from across the creek, and at the same time from the direction of the 
railroad trestle. Your men break and run east through the corn and you 
follow, but lose sight of them. When you cross the railroad fill you are 
fired on from the direction of the bridge. You finally stop behind the rail- 
road fill on the Quarry switch, where two of your men join you. 

Sergeant Allen: I would start south to rejoin the company and report. 

Captain: That would be a mistake. It would require a long time for a 



THE SERVICE OF INFORMATION. 81 

second patrol to make its way out over unknown ground, filled with hostile 
patrols, to a point where they could observe anything in rear of the hostile 
flank. You are now fairly familiar with the ground, you also know about 
where the hostile patrols are and you have two men remaining. After a 
brief rest in some concealed place nearby, you should start out again to 
make an effort to determine the strength of the troops in rear of the 
hostile flank near you, or at least remain out where you could keep a 
sharp lookout for any attempted turning movement by the enemy. Should 
anything important be observed you can send back a message and two of 
you remain to observe the next developments before returning. The in- 
formation you might send back and the additional information you might 
carry back, would possibly enable your own force to avoid a serious re- 
verse or obtain a decided victory. 

Your work would be very hazardous, but it is necessary, and while pos- 
sibly resulting in loss of one or two of your men, it might prevent the loss 
of hundreds in your main force. 



82 CHAPTER V. 



CHAPTER V. 

THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 
General Principles. 

81. The Service of Security embraces all those measures taken by a 
military force to protect itself against surprise, annoyance or observation 
by the enemy. On the march, that portion of a command thrown out to 
provide this security is called an advance, flank or rear guard, depending 
on whether it is in front, to the flank or in rear of the main command ; in 
camp or bivouac, it is called the outpost. 

82. The principal duties of these bodies being much the same, their gen- 
eral formations are also very similar. There is (1) the cavalry covering 
the front; next (2) a group (4 men to a platoon) or line of groups in ob- 
servation; then (3) the support, or line of supports, whose duty is to fur- 
nish the men for the observation groups and check an enemy's attempt to 
advance until reinforcements can arrive; still farther in rear is (4) the 
reserve. 

83. In small commands of an infantry regiment or less there usually 
will not be any cavalry to cover the front, and the reserve is generally 
omitted. Even the support may be omitted and the observation 
group or line of groups be charged with checking the enemy, 
in addition to its regular duties of observation. But whatever 
the technical designation of these subdivisions, the rearmost one is 
always in fact a reserve. For example, if the command is so small that 
the subdivision formally designated as the reserve is omitted, the rear ele- 
ment (squad or platoon or company, etc.) is used as a reserve. As this 
text deals principally with small commands and only those larger than a 
regiment usually have the subdivision termed the reserve, this distinction 
between the element in the Field Service Regulations called the reserve 
and the actual reserve, must be thoroughly understood. 

The arrangements or formations of all detachments thrown out from 
the main force to provide security against the enemy, are very flexible, 
varying with every military situation and every different kind of country. 
The commander of such a detachment must, therefore, avoid blindly ar- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 83 

ranging his men according to some fixed plan anu at terrain fixed dis- 
tances. Acquire a general understanding of the principles of the service 
of security and then with these principles as a foundation use common 
sense in disposing troops for this duty. 

ADVANCE GUARDS. 

84. Definition and Duties. An advance guard is a detachment of a 
marching column thrown out in advance to protect the main column from 
being surprised and to prevent its march from being delayed or inter- 
rupted. (The latter duty is generally forgotten and many irritating, short 
halts result, which wear out or greatly fatigue the main body, the strength 
of which the advance guard is supposed to conserve.) 

In detail the duties of the advance guard are : 

1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by reconnoitering 
to the front and flanks. 

2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their observing, 
firing upon or delaying the main body. 

3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit the 
main body to prepare for action. 

4. When the enemy is met on the defensive, to seize a good position and 
locate his lines, care being taken not to bring on a general engagement un- 
less the advance guard commander is authorized to do so. 

5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way possible 
the steady march of the column. 

85. Strength. The strength of the advance guard varies from one- 
ninth to one-third of the total command. The larger the force the larger 
in proportion is the advance guard, for a larger command takes relatively 
longer to prepare for action than a small one. For example, a company 
of 100 men would ordinarily have an advance guard of from one to two 
squads, as the company could deploy as skirmishers in a few seconds. On 
the other hand, a division of 20,000 men would ordinarily have an advance 
guard of about 4,500 men, all told, as it would require several hours for a 
division to deploy and the advance guard must be strong enough to make 
a stubborn fight. 

86. Composition. The advance guard is principally composed of in- 
fantry, preceded if possible, by cavalry well to the front. When there is 
only infantry, much more patrolling is required of the front troops than 



84 CHAPTER V. 

when cavalry (called "Advance cavalry") is out in advance. This book 
does not deal with large advance guards containing artillery and engineers. 
Machine guns, however, will be frequently used in small advance guards to 
hold bridges, defiles, etc. 

87. Distance From Main Body. The distance at which the advance 
guard precedes the main body or the main body follows the advance guard 
depends on the military situation and the ground. It should always be 
great enough to allow the main body time to deploy before it can be seri- 
ously engaged. For instance, the advance guard of a company, say 1 
squad, should be 350 to 500 yards in advance of the company. The dis- 
tance from the leading man back to the principal group of the squad should 
generally be at least 150 yards. This, added to the distance back to the 
main body or company, makes a distance of from 500 to 650 yards from the 
leading man to the head of the main body. 

Examples: 

Command Advance Guard Distance (yds.) 

Patrol of 1 squad 2 men 100 to 300 

Section of 3 squads 4 men 200 to 400 

Inf. platoon of 50 men 1 squad 300 to 450 

Cav. platoon of 20 men 4 men 300 to 450 

Inf. company of 108 men 1 to 2 squads 350 to 500 

Cav. troop of 86 men l A platoon 450 to 600 

Inf. battalion J A to 1 company 500 to 700 

Cav. squadron ^ to 1 troop 600 to 800 

These are not furnished as fixed numbers and distances, but are merely 
to give the student an approximate, concrete idea. 

88. Connecting Files. It should be remembered that between the ad- 
vance guard and the main body, and between the several groups into 
which the advance guard is subdivided, connecting" files are placed so as 
to furnish a means of communicating, generally by signals, between the 
elements (groups) of the column. There should be a connecting file for 
at least every 300 yards. For example, suppose the advance guard of a 
platoon is 300 yards in front of the main body. In ordinary rolling coun- 
try, not heavily wooded, a connecting file would be placed half way be- 
tween the two elements — 150 yards from each one. 

It is generally wiser to use two men together instead of one, because 
this leaves one man free to watch for signals from the front while the 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 85 

other watches the main body. However, in very small commands like a 
company, this is not practicable, as the extra man could not be spared. 

FORMATION OF ADVANCE GUARDS. 

89. Subdivisions. The advance guard of a large force like a brigade 
or division is subdivided into a number of groups or elements, gradually 
increasing in size from front to rear. The reason for this is that, as has 
already been explained, a larger group or force requires longer to deploy 
or prepare to fight than a smaller one, therefore the small subdivisions 
are placed in front where they can quickly deploy and hold the enemy 
temporarily in check while the larger elements in rear are deploying. The 
number of these subdivisions decreases as the strength of the advance 
guard decreases, until we find the advance guard of a company consists 
of one or two squads, which naturally cannot be subdivided into more 
than two groups; and the advance guard of a squad composed of two 
men, which admits of no subdivision. 

Distance to next ele- 
ment in rear. 
Advance Cavalry • 1 to 5 miles 

f Advance party. . . . ( Point 150 to 300 yds 

Support J (furnishes patrols) [Advance party proper 300 to 600 y 3s. 

( Support proper 400 to 800 yds. 

Reserve (usually omitted in small commands) 500 yds. to 1 mile 

The distances vary principally with the size of the command — slightly 
with the character of the country. 

91. The advance cavalry is that part of the advance guard going in 
front of all the foot troops. It is generally one to five miles in advance 
of the infantry of the advance guard, reconnoitering at least far enough 
to the front and flanks to guard the column against surprise by artillery 
fire— 4,500 yds. 

92. Support — (a) The support constitutes the principal element or 
group of all advance guards. It follows the advance cavalry, when there 
is any, and leads the advance guard when there is no cavalry. The sup- 
port of a large command is subdivided within itself in much the same 
manner as the advance guard as a whole is subdivided. It varies in 
strength from one-fourth to one-half of the advance guard. 

(b) Advance party — As the support moves out it sends forward an ad- 



86 CHAPTER V. 

of *he country and size of the command. For example, the advance party 
of a support of one company of 108 men, would ordinarily be composed 
vatic e party several hundred yards, t.ie distance varying with the nature 
of one section of three squads, and would march about 300 yards in ad- 
vance of the company in open country, and about 200 yards in wooded 
country. 

The advance party sends out the patrols to the front and flanks to guard 
the main body of the support from surprise by effective rifle fire. Patrols 
are only sent out to the flanks to examine points that cannot be observed 
from the road. As a rule they will have to rejoin some portion of the 
column in rear of the advance party. As the advance party becomes de- 
pleted in strength in this manner, fresh men are sent forward from the 
main body of the support to replace those who have fallen behind while 
patrolling. When there is advance cavalry, much less patrolling is re- 
quired of the infantry. 

(c) The point is a patrol sent forward by the advance party 150 to 300 
yards. When the advance party is large enough the point should or- 
dinarily consist of a complete squad, commanded by an officer or experi- 
enced noncommissioned officer. It is merely a patrol in front of the col- 
umn and takes the formation described for patrols. 

(d) The commander of the support • ordinarily marches with the ad- 
vance party. He should have a map and control of the guide, if any is 
present. He sees that the proper road is followed ; that guides are left 
in towns and at cross roads ; that bridges, roads, etc., are repaired prompt- 
ly so as not to delay the march of the column and that information of the 
enemy is promptly sent back to the advance guard commander; he veri- 
fies the correctness of this information, if possible. 

93. (a) A thorough understanding of the arrangement of the support 
and the duties of the leaders of its subdivisions — point, flank patrols, ad- 
vance party and main body (of the support) — is of the greatest importance 
to a noncommissioned officer. For example, the ignorance of one non- 
commissioned officer leading the advance party of a column of troops six 
miles long can cause the entire column to be delayed. If he halts because 
a few shots are fired at his men, and conducts a careful reconnaissance 
before attacking (instead of pushing right in on the enemy, forcing him 
to fall back quickly, if a weak detachment; or, to disclose his strength, if 
strong), the entire column, six miles long, is halted, the march inter- 
rupted, valuable time lost, and what is more important, the men irritated 
and tired out. 



The service of security. 87 

(b) The leader of the point must understand that as the principal duty 
of an advance guard is to secure the safe, and uninterrupted march of the 
main body, he is the first man to discharge this duty. If, for example, his 
squad receives a volley of shots from some point to the front, he cannot 
take the time and precautions the commander of a larger body would take 
to reconnoiter the enemy's position, determine something about his 
strength, etc., before risking an attack. If he did he would not be secur- 
ing the uninterrupted march of the main body. He has to deploy instantly 
and press the enemy hard until the hostile opposition disappears or the 
advance party comes up and its commander takes charge. The point will 
lose men in this way, but it is necessary, for otherwise one small combat 
patrol could delay the march time after time. 

(c) The same problem must be met in much the same manner by the 
leader of the advance party. In this case there is more time to think, as 
the point, being in advance, will have begun the fight before the advance 
party arrives; but the leader of the advance party must use his men freely 
and quickly to force the enemy to "show his hand," thus preventing small 
harassing or combat detachments from delaying the march. 

(d) As the subdivisions of the advance guard become larger their lead- 
ers act with increasing caution, for as soon as it develops that the enemy 
in front is really present in some strength, then a halt becomes obligatory 
and a careful reconnaissance necessary. 

(e) The leader of every subdivision must always start a reconnaissance 
the instant the enemy develops. He may, as in the case of the point, only 
send one man around to discover the enemy's strength ; or, if the leader 
of the main body of the support, he may send an entire squad. In almost 
every case the instant he has given his orders for deploying and firing at 
or rushing the enemy, he sends out his man or men to work around to a 
position permitting a view of the hostile force. Every noncommissioned 
officer should impress this on his memory so that he will not forget it in 
the excitement of a sudden engagement. 

(f) No attempt should be made to subdivide the advance guard of a ' 
small force into all the elements previously described. For example, the 
advance guard of a squad is simply a point of one or two men; the ad- 
vance guard of a company is usually no more than a squad acting as a 
point, the squad actually having several men from 100 to 150 yards in ad- 
vance, who really constitute a point for the squad; the advance guard 
of a battalion would usually consist of a company or less distributed as an 
advance party proper and a point. The advance guard of a regiment 



88 CHAPTER V. 

would have no reserve — if, for example, a battalion were used as the ad- 
vance guard of a regiment, there would be only a support, which would 
be distributed about as follows : A support proper of about three com- 
panies and an advance party (point included) of about one company. 

(8ATTAL/ON ACT/NGAS ADMA/CE G//A/?D. AV ZteSEftME) 

SUPPORT 

, A ^ 

/ Support proper ?. /4drance p>arty 

(3 Cos.) ' (/ Co.) 

/ Advance Z Point 

party proper 

(3 Squads) (/Squad) 

400 , /SO _ 

i i.-.CZ 1 C=ZH — to — K=>- TO — »-0 

SOO YPS. 200 YDS. 



94. Beserve. An advance guard large enough to have a reserve would 
be distributed as follows: 

' ADVANCE Gi/ARD 

: La -_^ 

/ Reserve 2. Support 

A 

/ Support /? Advance, 
proper party 

r~ — Ar - s 

i m — 21 — h n - Y -Kzz> < - X — K) 

/.Advance 2 Point 
parfyproper 

The distance Z would be greater than Y and Y would be greater than 
X. For example, a regiment acting as the advance guard of a brigade 
would, under ordinary conditions, be distributed about as follows: 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 89 

ADVANCE GUARD 
'/. Reserve 2. Support 

(2 baftaliops) (/ battalionj 

t A > 

/ Support 2. Advance 
proper party 

(3 Cos.) (/CO.) 

'/ K N 

(,00 *oo I ISO ^» 

I — 1 | , H - TO — - I Y +— TO H M TO — HJ 

1 1 I soq ros 6(?0 Y£>s 3Q0 r Q S 

/.Advance 2. Point 
partyproper 

As only large commands have a reserve, which would always be com- 
manded by an officer, noncommissioned officers need not give this much 
consideration, but it must be understood that while this fourth subdivision 
of the advance guard is the only one officially termed reserve, the last 
subdivision of any advance guard actually is a reserve, no matter what its 
official designation. 

95. The advance guard of a cavalry command adopts formations 
similar to those described above, except that the distances are increased 
because of the rapidity with which the command can close up or deploy. 
An advance party with a few patrols is usually enough for a squadron, 
and precedes it from 600 to 1,000 yards. 

96. Reconnaissance. In reconnaissance the patrols are, as a rule, 
small (from two to six men). 

The flanking patrols, whether of the advance cavalry or of the advance 
party, are sent out to examine the country wherever the enemy might be 
concealed. If the nature of the ground permits, these patrols march across 
country or along roads and trails parallel to the march of the column. 
For cavalry patrols this is often possible; but with infantry patrols and 
even with those that are mounted, reconnaissance is best done by sending 
the patrols to high places along the line of march to overlook the country 
and examine the danger points. These patrols signal the results of their 
observations and, unless they have other instructions, join the columns by 
the nearest routes, other patrols being sent out as the march proceeds and 
as the nature of the country requires. 

Deserters, suspicious characters and bearers of flags of truce (the 
latter blindfolded), are taken to the advance guard commander. 

97. Advance Guard Order. On receipt of the order for a march des- 
ignating the troops for the advance guard, the commander of the latter 
makes his estimate of the situation ; that is, he looks at the map or makes 



90 CHAPTER V. 

inquiries to determine what sort of a country he must march through and 
the nature of the roads ; he considers what the chances are of encounter- 
ing the enemy, etc., and then how he should best arrange his advance 
guard to meet these conditions, and what time the different elements of 
his advance guard must start in order to take their proper place in the 
column. He then issues his order at the proper time — the evening before 
if possible and he deems it best, or the morning of the march. 

The order for a large advance guard would ordinarily be written; for a 
small command it would almost invariably be verbal, except that the com- 
mander or leader of each element should always make written notes of 
the principal points, such as the road to be followed, time to start, dis- 
tances, etc. 

Written advance guard order: 

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book) 

Field Orders Advance Guard, Det. 1st Div. 

No. 1. (x) Leavenworth, Kansas, 

Troops 10 Aug. '08, 5.30 A. M. 

(a) Advance Cavalry 1. A Red force of all arms is reported to have camped near 
Captain B ATCHISON 1 last night. Its cavalry patrols were seen 

Tr. A, 1st Cav. near KICKAPOO yesterday, 
(less 1 squad) 

(b) Support: Our main body will follow the advance guard at one- 
Major C half mile. 

1st Bn. 1st Inf. 

1 Squad Tr. A, 2. This advance guard will march on KICKAPOO. 

1st Cav. 

Det. Co. A, Engrs. 3. (a) The advance cavalry will leave camp at once and 

(c) Reserve— in march via ATCHISON CROSS to KICKAPOO, SHERI- 
order of march: DAN'S DRIVE and the country west of the line of march 

will be carefully observed. 

Hq. and 2nd Bn. (b) The point of the support will start at 5:45 A. M. 

1st Inf. and march by the ATCHISON CROSS-FRENCHMAN- 

Btry. B, 5th KICKAPOO road. 
F. A. 
3d Bn. 1st Inf. 

Det. Amb. Co. No. 1 (c) The reserve will follow the support at 800 yards. 

4. The field train will assemble near 70 at 7 A. M. under Captain X, Quarter- 
master, 1st Inf., and join the field train of the main body as that train passes. 

5. I shall be at the head of the reserve. 

Y, 

Colonel, 

Commanding. 



(x) This order is issued pursuant to a previous "march order," and assumes that 
the troops designated for the advance guard have been notified when and where to 
assemble. 

( x ) About 14 miles northwest of Fort Eeavenworth. 



THE SERVICE OP SECURITY. 91 

• Delivered verbally to assembled troop, battalion and battery command- 
ers and staff; copy to det. commander by Lt. N. 

Note: The paragraphs on the left lettered (a), (b), (c), etc., are called 
the distribution, and those on the right numbered 1, 2, 3, etc., are called 
body. 

98. In issuing his order to an advance guard a noncommissioned officer 
should follow the form above, except that it should be verbal, and the 
troops in each part of the advance guard should be named in the body 
of the order. For example, in giving an advance guard order for one 
platoon, the noncommissioned officer would say, for instance, to his pla- 
toon : 

"A Red battalion is reported to have camped near Atchison last night. 
Our battalion will march towards Kickapoo this morning. 

"This platoon will form the advance guard and will march out the 
Atchison Pike, followed by the main body at 500 yards. 

"The point will start at 5.45 A. M. and move by the Atchison Cross- 
Frenchman-Kickapoo road. The remainder of the advance guard will 
follow at 300 yards. 

"I will march with the point." 

ADVANCE GUARD PROBLEMS. 
Problem No. 1 (Infantry). 

Captain {to one platoon of his company) : We will assume that our bat- 
talion camped last night at Oxford (Elementary Map) in the enemy's 
co'tmtry. It is now sunrise, 5 :30 A. M. ; camp has been broken and we 
are ready to march. The officers have returned from reporting to the 
Major for orders and I fall in the company and give the following orders : 

"A regiment of the enemy's cavalry is thought to be marching towards 
Salem from the south. Our battalion will march at once towards Salem to 
guard the railroad trestle over Sandy Creek, following this road (pointing 
southeast along the road out of Oxford) and the Chester Pike, which is 
one and three-quarters miles from here. 

"This company will form the advance guard. 

"Sergeant Adams, you will take Corporal Baker's squad and form the 
point, followed by the remainder of the company at about 400 yards. Pa- 
trols and connecting files will be furnished by the company. 

"The company wagon will join the wagons of the battalion. 

"I will be with the company. 



92 CHAPTER V. 

"Move out at once." 

The weather is fine and the roads are good and free from dust. It is 
August and nearly all the crops are harvested. Bushes and weeds form 
a considerable growth along the fences bordering the road. 

Sergeant, give your orders. 

Sergeant Adams: 1st squad, 1. Right, 2. FACE; 1. Forward, 2. 
MARCH. Corporal Baker, take Carter (Baker's rear rank man) and go 
ahead of the squad about 200 yards. Move out rapidly until you get your 
distance and then keep us in sight. 

I would then have the two leading men of the rest of the squad follow 
on opposite sides of the road, as close to the fence as possible for good 
walking. This would put the squad in two columns of files of three men 
each, leaving the main roadway clear and making the squad as incon- 
spicuous as possible, without interfering with ease of marching or sepa- 
rating the men. (Par. 92-c, p. 86.) What sort of crops are in the fields 
on either side of the road? 

Captain: The field on the right (south) is meadow land; that on the left, 
as far as the railroad, is cut hay ; beyond the railroad there is more 
meadow land. 

Sergeant Adams: I would have told Corporal Baker to wait at the cross 
roads by the Baker house for orders and 

Captain: If you were actually on the ground you probably could not see 
the cross roads from Oxford. In solving map problems like these do not 
take advantage of seeing on the map all the country that you are supposed 
to go over, and then give orders about doing things at places concerning 
which you would not probably have any knowledge if actually on the 
ground without the map. 

Besides, in this particular case, it was a mistake to have your point 
wait at the cross roads. If there was any danger of their taking the wrong 
road it would be a different matter, but here your mission requires you to 
push ahead. (Par. 93-b, p. 87.) The Major is trying to get south of 
the trestle towards Salem before the cavalry can arrive and destroy it. 

Sergeant Adams: I would march steadily along the road, ordering the 
last man to keep a lookout to the rear for signals from the connecting file 
(Par. 88), and I would direct one of the leading men to watch for signals 
from Corporal Baker. 

Captain: You should have given the direction about watching for sig- 
nals earlier, as this is very important. You also should have ordered two 
men to follow along the timber by the creek to your south until you sig- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 93 

naled for them to come in. The trees along the creek would obstruct your 
view over the country beyond the creek. 

Sergeant Adams: But I thought, Captain, that the patrolling was to be 
done by the company. 

Captain-' Yes, the patrolling is to be done by the company, but the creek 
is only a quarter of a mile, about 400 yards, from the road you are follow- 
ing and the men sent there are merely flankers, not a patrol. You have 
eight men under your command and you are responsible for the ground 
within several hundred yards on either side of your route of march. Long 
Ridge is almost too far for you to send your men, because they would fall 
far behind in climbing and descending its slopes, but it would not be a 
great mistake if you sent two men there. As Long Ridge affords an ex- 
tended view of the valley through which the Chester Pike runs, a patrol 
should go up on it and remain there until the battalion passes, and this 
would be more than the leading squad could be expected to attend to. The 
creek is almost too far from the road in places, but as it is open meadow 
land you can keep the men within easy touch of you and recall them by 
signal at any moment you desire. In this work you can see how much de- 
pends on good judgment and a proper understanding of one's mission. 

Corporal Baker, explain how you would move out with Carter. 

Corporal Baker: We would alternate the walk and double time until we 
had gotten about 200 yards ahead of the squad. I would then say, "Carter, 
walk along this side of the road (indicates side), keeping on the lookout 
for signals from the squad. I will go about 50 yards ahead of you." I 
would keep to the opposite side of the road from Carter, trying to march 
steadily at the regular marching gait, and keeping a keen watch on every- 
thing in front and to the flanks. 

Captain: Very good. When you arrive at the cross roads you see a man 
standing in the yard of the Baker house. 

Corporal Baker: I would not stop, but would continue on by the cross 
roads, as I have no time to question the man and the Sergeant will want 
to do that. I would call to him and ask him if he had seen any of the 
enemy about and how far it was to the Chester Pike. If anything looked 
suspicious around the house or barnyard, I would investigate. 

Captain: Sergeant, you arrive at the cross roads, and see the Corporal 
and Carter going on ahead of you. 

Sergeant Adams: I would have already signaled to the two men follow- 
ing the creek to come in and would send a man to meet them with the 
following order: "Tell Davis to move along the railroad fill with Evans, 



94 CHAPTER V. 

keeping abreast of us. Then you return to me." I would then say, "Fiske, 
look in that house and around the barn and orchard and then rejoin me 
down this road (pointing east)." I would have the civilian join me and 
walk down the road with me while I questioned him. 

Captain-' Do you think you have made careful arrangements for search- 
ing the house, etc., by leaving only one man to do the work? 

Sergeant Adams: I have not sufficient men nor time enough to do much 
more. I simply want to make sure things are reasonably safe and I thought 
that a couple of men from the main body of the advance guard would do 
any careful searching, questioning, etc., that might be deemed necessary. 
I must not delay the march. 

Captain: That is right. You learn nothing from the civilian and he does 
not arouse any suspicion on your part. You continue along the road. The 
fields to the north of the road are in wheat stubble; the ground to the 
south, between your road and the railroad, is rough, rocky grass land with 
frequent clumps of bushes. Davis and Evans, your right flankers on the 
railroad fill, are just approaching the cut; Fiske has rejoined; Corporal 
Jones and his men arc about 200 yards from the road forks at Brown's, 
and you and your four men are 200 yards in their rear, at the turn of the 
road. At this moment a half dozen shots are fired down the road in your 
direction from behind the wall along the edge of the orchard on the Brown 
farm. This firing continues and your two leading men are lying down at 
the roadside returning the fire. Tell me quickly just what you are going 
to do? 

Sergeant Adams: I order my four men to deploy as skirmishers in that 
field (pointing to the rough ground south of the road) ; I go under the 
fence with the men and lead them forward at a fast run, unless the fire is 
very heavy. 

Captain (interrupting the Sergeant) : Davis, you had just reached the 
cut on the railroad when this happened. What do you do? 

Private Davis: I take Evans forward with me at a run through the cut. 
What do I see along the Chester Pike or Sandy Creek? 

Captain: You see no sign of the enemy any place, except the firing over 
the wall. 

Private Davis-' I run down the south side of the fill and along towards 
the road with Evans to open fire on the enemy from their flank, and also 
to see what is in the orchard. I will probably cross the road so that I can 
see behind the stone wall. 

Captain: That's fine and shows how you should go ahead at such a 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 95 

time without any orders. There is usually no time or opportunity at such 
a-moment for sending instructions and you must use common sense and 
do something. Generally it would have been better to have tried to signal 
or send word back that there was nothing in sight along the road or in 
the valley, but in this particular case you could probably do more good by 
going quickly around in rear as you did, to discover what was there and 
assist in quickly dislodging whatever it was. If there had been no nose of 
the ridge to hide you as you came up and a convenient railroad fill to hurry 
along behind as you made for the road, your solution might have been 
quite different. 

Sergeant, continue with your movements. 

Sergeant Adams' I would attempt to rush the wall. If the fire were too 
heavy, I would open fire (at will) with all my men, and, if I seemed to get 
a little heavier fire than the enemy's, I would start half of my men for- 
ward on a rush while the others fired. I would try to rush in on the 
enemy with as little delay as possible, until it developed that he had more 
than a small detachment there. I assumed it was a delaying patrol in front 
of me, and as my mission requires me to secure the uninterrupted march 
of the main body, I must not permit any small detachment to delay me. 
If, however, it proves to be a larger force, for instance, the head of an ad- 
vanced guard, I will lose some men by plunging in, but as I understand it, 
that is the duty of the point. Then again, if it be the head of a hostile ad- 
vance guard, I will want to rush them out of their favorable position under 
cover of the stone wall, buildings and orchard; before any more of their 
force can come up. This would give the favorable position to our force ; 
by acting too cautiously we would lose the valuable moments in which the 
enemy's reinforcements (next element of the advance guard) were com- 
ing up, with this desirable position being weakly held by a small part of 
the enemy. 

Captain: That is all correct. What messages would you have sent? 

Sergeant Adams- Up to the present time I would not have sent any. 
I could not have sent any. I could not afford to take the time to send a 
man back, nor could I spare the man. Besides, all I could say was that 
we were fired on, and you should be able to see and hear that from where 
the company is. 

Captain: About the time you reached the position of Corporal Baker the 
firing ceases, and when you reach the wall you see five mounted men gal- 
loping northeast up Farm Lane. The Brown farm appears to be deserted. 

Sergeant Adams: I would turn to one of the men and say, "Run back to 



96 CHAPTER V. 

the Captain and tell him we were fired on from this orchard by a mounted 
patrol of five men who are galloping off up a lane to the northeast. I am 
going south." When he had repeated the message I would start south 
down the Chester Pike, directing Corporal Baker to follow this road south 
and to tell Davis to follow the high ridge west of the road, going through 
the clump of woods just ahead. I would send one man as a right flanker 
to follow the west bank of Sandy Creek. This would leave me with two 
men, one watching for signals from the front and along Sandy Creek, the 
other from Davis and from the rear. I would expect to see a patrol from 
the company moving across towards Boling Woods. Had I not been mixed 
up in a fight as I approached the Brown farm I would have sent two men 
as left flankers across country to the cut on the Chester Pike on the west- 
ern edge of the Boling Woods. 

Captain: Very good. That is sufficient for this problem. All of you 
should have caught the idea of the principal duties of the point and flank- 
ers of an advance guard. You must watch the country to prevent being 
surprised and you must at the same time manage to push ahead with the 
least possible delay. The point cannot be very cautious so far as concerns 
its own safety, for this would mean frequent halts which would delay the 
troops in rear, but it must be cautious about reconnoitering all parts of the 
ground near the road which might conceal large bodies of the enemy. 

The leader of the point must be careful in using his men or he will get 
them so scattered that they will become entirely separated and he wil! 
lose all control of them. As soon as the necessity for flankers on one side 
of the line of march no longer exists, signal for them to rejoin and do not 
send them out again so long as you can see from the road all the country 
you should cover. 

Problem No. 2 (Infantry). 

Captain (to one platoon of his company) : Let us assume that this pla- 
toon is the advance party of an advance guard, marching through Salem 
along the Chester Pike (Par. 92-b, p. 85). One squad is 350 yards in front, 
acting as the point. The enemy is thought to be very near, but only two 
mounted patrols have been seen during the day. The command is march- 
ing for Chester. The day is hot, the roads are good but dusty, and the 
crops are about to be harvested. 

Sergeant Adams, explain how you would conduct the march of the ad- 
vance party, beginning with your arrival at the cross roads in Salem. 

Sergeant Adams: The platoon would be marching in column of squads 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 97 

and I would be at the head. Two pairs of connecting files would keep me 
in touch with the point (Par. 88). I would now give this order: "Cor- 
poral Smith, take two men from your squad and patrol north along this 
road (pointing up the Tracy-Maxey road) for a mile and then rejoin the 
column on this road (Chester Pike), to the west of you." I would then 
say to Private Barker, "Take Carter and cut across to that railroad fill and 
go along the top of that (Sandy) ridge, rejoining the column beyond the 
ridge. Corporal Smith with a patrol is going up this road. Keep a look- 
out for him." When we reached the point where the road crosses the 
south nose of Sandy Ridge and I saw the valley in front of me with the 
long high ridge west of Sandy Creek, running parallel to the Chester Pike 
and about 800'yards west of it, I would give this order: "Corporal Davis, 
take the three remaining men in Corporal Smith's squad, cross the creek 
there (pointing in the direction of the Barton farm) go by that orchard, 
and move north along that high ridge, keeping the column in sight. Make 
an effort to keep abreast of the advance guard, which will continue along 
this road." 

I gave Corporal Davis the remaining men out of Corporal Smith's 
squad because I did not want to break up another squad and as this is, 
in my opinion, a very important patrol, I wanted a noncommissioned of- 
ficer in charge of it. Unless something else occurs this will be all the 
patrols I intend sending out until we pass the steel railroad trestle over 
Sandy Creek. 

Captain: Your point about not breaking up a squad when you could 
avoid it by using the men remaining in an already broken squad, is a 
very important one. Take this particular case. You first sent out two 
pairs of connecting files between the advance party and your point — 4 
men. This leaves a corporal and three men in that squad. If we assume 
that no patrols were out when we passed through Salem, this corporal 
and two of his men could have been sent up the Tracy-Maxey road, leav- 
ing one man to be temporarily attached to some squad. From the last 
mentioned squad you would pick your two men for the Sandy Ridge pa- 
trol and also the corporal and three men for the Barton farm, etc., patrol. 
This would leave three men in this squad and you would have under your 
immediate command two complete squads and three men. As the pa- 
trols return, organize new squads immediately and constantly endeavor 
to have every man attached to a squad. This is one of your most im- 
portant duties, as it prevents disorder when some serious situation sud- 
denly arises. Also it is one of the duties of the detachment commander 
that is generally overlooked until too late. 



98 CHAPTER V. 

The direction you sent your three patrols was good and their orders 
clear, covering the essential points, but as you have in a very short space 
of time, detached nine men, almost a third of your advance party, don't 
you think you should have economized more on men? 

Sergeant Adams: The Sandy Ridge patrol is as small as you can make 
it — two men. I thought the other two patrols were going to be detached 
so far from the column that they should be large enough to send a mes- 
sage or two and still remain out. I suppose it would be better to send 
but two men with Corporal Davis, but I think Corporal Smith should have 
two with him. 

Captain: Yes, I agree with you, for you are entering a valley which is, 
in effect, a defile, and the Tracy-Maxey road is a very dangerous avenue 
of approach to your main body. But you must always bear in mind that 
it is a mistake to use one more man than is needed to accomplish the ob- 
ject in view. The more you send away from your advance party, the 
more scattered and weaker your command becomes, and this is dispersion, 
which constitutes one of the gravest, and at the same time, most frequent 
tactical errors. 

To continue the problem, we will suppose you have reached the stone 
bridge over Sandy Creek; the point is at the cross roads by the Smith 
house; you can see the two men moving along Sandy Ridge; and Cor- 
poral Davis's patrol is just entering the orchard by the Barton farm. Fir- 
ing suddenly commences well to the front and you hear your point reply 
to it. 

Sergeant Adams: I halt to await information from the point. 

Captain: That is absolutely wrong. You command the advance party 
of an advance guard ; your mission requires you to secure the uninter- 
rupted march of the main body; and at the first contact you halt, thus 
interrupting the march. (Par. 84, p. 83.) The sooner you reach the point, 
the better are your chances for driving off the enemy if he is not too 
strong, or the quicker you find out his strength and give your commander 
in the rear the much desired information. 

Sergeant Adams: Then I push ahead with t*he advance party, sending 
back the following message 

Captain (interrupting) : It is not time to send a message. You know 
too little and in a few minutes you will be up with the point where you 
can hear what has happened and see the situation for yourself. Then you 
can send back a valuable message. When but a few moment's delay will 
probably permit you to secure much more detailed information, it is gen- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 99 

erally best to wait for that short time and thus avoid using two mes- 
sengers. When you reach the cross roads you find six men of the point 
deployed behind the fence, under cover of the trees along the County 
Road, just west of the Chester Pike, firing at the stone wall along the 
Mill's farm lane. The enemy appears to be deployed behind this stone 
wall, from the Chester Pike west for a distance of 50 yards, and his fire 
is much heavier than that of your point. You think he has at least twenty 
rifles there. You cannot see down the Chester Pike beyond the enemy's 
position. Your patrol on Sandy Ridge is midway between the 68 and 66 
knolls, moving north. The ground in your front, west of the road, is a 
potato field ; that east of the road as far as the swamp, is rough grass land. 

Sergeant Adams: I give order, "Corporal Gibbs, deploy your squad to 
the right of the Pike and push forward between the Pike and the swamp. 
Corporal Hall (commands the point), continue a heavy fire. Here are 
six more men for your squad." I give him the four connecting files and 
two of the three men in the advance party whose squad is on patrol duty. 
"Corporal Jackson, get your squad under cover here. Lacey, run back to 
the Major and tell him the point has been stopped by what appears to be 
20 of the enemy deployed behind a stone wall across the valley 500 yards 
in our front. I am attacking with the advance party." 

Captain: Corporal .Davis (commands patrol near Barton farm), you can 
hear the firing and see that the advance is stopped. What do you do? 

Corporal Davis: I would head straight across for the clump of woods 
on the ridge just above the Mills' farm, moving as rapidly as possible. 

Captain: That is all right. Sergeant, Corporal Hall's squad keeps up a 
heavy fire; Corporal Gibb's squad deploys to the right of the pike, rushes 
forward about 75 yards, but is forced to lie down by the enemy's fire, and 
opens fire. Corporal Gibbs, what would your command for firing be? 

Corporal Gibbs: AT THE BOTTOM OF THAT WALL. BATTLE 
SIGHT. CLIP FIRING. 

Captain: Why at the bottom of the wall? 

Corporal Gibbs-' The men are winded and excited and will probably fire 
high, so I gave them the bottom of the wall as an objective. 

Captain-' The enemy's fire seems as heavy as yours. Sergeant, what do 
you do? 

Sergeant Adams: I give this order, "Corporal Jackson, deploy your 
squad as skirmishers on the left of Corporal Hall's squad and open fire." 
What effect does this additional fire have on the enemy? 



100 CHAPTER V. 

Captain: His bullets seem to go higher and wilder. You appear to be 
getting fire superiority over him. 

Sergeant Adams: If I do not see any signs of the enemy being rein- 
forced, dust in the road behind his position, etc., I take immediate com- 
mand of the squads of Corporals Hall and Jackson, and lead them for- 
ward on a rush across the potato field. 

Captain: Corporal Gibbs, what do you do when you see the other two 
squads rush? 

Corporal Gibbs: I order, "FIRE AT WIIX," and urge the men to shoot 
rapidly in order to cover the advance. 

Captain : Sergeant Adams's squads are forced to halt after advancing 
about 150 yards. 

Corporal Gibbs: I keep up a hot fire until they can resume their firing, 
when I lead my squad forward in a rush. 

Captain: What do you do, Sergeant? 

Sergeant Adams: I would have the Corporals keep up a heavy fire. By 
this time I should think the support would be up to the cross roads. 

Captain: It is, but have you given up your attack? 

Sergeant Adams: If it looks as if I could drive the enemy out on my 
next rush, I do so, but otherwise I remain where I am, as I have no re- 
serve under my control and the action has gotten too serious for me to 
risk anything more when my chief is practically on the ground to make 
the next decision. He should have heard something about what is on 
the Pike behind the enemy, from the patrol on Sandy Ridge. 

Captain: Your solution seems correct to me. Why did you send Cor- 
poral Gibbs's squad up between the pike and the swamp? 

Sergeant Adams: It looked like he would strike the enemy from a bet- 
ter quarter ; there appeared to be better cover that way, afforded by the 
turn in the road, which must have some weeds, etc., along it, and the 
swamp would prevent him from getting too far separated from the re- 
mainder of the advance party. 

Captain : The Sergeant's orders for the attack were very good. He gave 
his squad leaders some authority and attached his extra men to a squad. 
He did not attempt to assume direct control of individual men, but man- 
aged the three squads and made the squad leaders manage the individual 
men. This is the secret of successful troop leading. His orders were 
short, plain and given in proper sequence. 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 101 

Problem No. 3 (Infantry). 

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.) 

Situation. 

A Blue battalion, in hostile country, is in camp for the night, August 
5-6, at Sprong (/a'). At 9:00 P. M., August 5th, Lieutenant A, Adjutant 
gives a copy of the following order to Sergeant B : 

1st Battalion, 1st Infantry, 
Sprong, Kansas, 
5 Aug., '09. 
Field Orders No. 5. 

1. The enemy's infantry is 6 miles east of FORT LEAVENWORTH. 
His cavalry patrols were seen at F {qg') today. 

Our regiment will reach FRENCHMAN'S (oc f ) at noon tomorrow. 

2. The battalion will march tomorrow to seize the ROCK ISLAND 
BRIDGE (q) at FORT LEAVENWORTH. 

3. (a) The advance guard, consisting of 1st platoon Co. A and mounted 
orderlies B, C, and D, under Sergeant B, will precede the main body at 
400 yards. 

(b) The head of the main body will march at 6:30 A. M. from 19, via 
the 17 (jc')— 15 tig')— 5 (/m')— FORT LEAVENWORTH (om') road. 

4. The baggage will follow close behind the main body under escort of 
Corporal D and 1 squad Co. B. 

5. Send reports to head of main body. 

C, 
Major, Comdg. 

Copies to the company commanders, to Sergeant B and Corporal D. 
A Required, I. Give Sergeant B's estimate of the situation. (The esti- 
mate of the military situation includes the following points : 

1. His orders or mission and how much discretion he is allowed. 

2. The ground as it influences his duty. 

3. The position, strength and probable intentions of the enemy. 

4. Sergeant B's decision. 

Answer. 1. The size of the advance guard, its route and the distance it 
is to move in front of the main body are prescribed by Major C. Sergeant 



102 CHAPTER V. 

B is free to divide up the advance guard as he sees fit, to use the various 
parts so as to best keep open the way of the main body, maintain the dis- 
tance of 400 yards in front of it, and protect it from surprise by the enemy. 

2. The ground may be such as to make easy or to hinder reconnaissance, 
such as hills or woods; to impede or hasten the march, such as roads, 
streams, defiles ; to offer good or poor defensive positions ; to offer good 
or poor opportunities for an attack. Sergeant B sees from his map that 
the ground is rolling and open as far as Kern (/*') with good positions for 
reconnaissance and for defense or attack. There is a bridge over Salt 
Creek (ig f ) which has steep banks and will be a considerable obstacle if 
the bridge has been destroyed. From this creek to Kern the advance 
would be under effective fire from Hancock Hill (ki') so that these 
heights must be seized before the main body reaches 15 {jg'). 

Beyond Kern the heavy woods make reconnaissance difficult and must 
be treated somewhat like a defile by the point. (Par. 56, p. 57.) 

3. There is little to fear from the main body of the enemy which is V/ 2 
miles farther from the Rock Island bridge than we are, but we know the 
enemy has cavalry. The size of the cavalry force is not known, and may 
be sufficient to cause us considerable delay, especially in the woods. The 
enemy's evident intention is to keep us from seizing the bridge. 

4. Having considered all these points, Sergeant B comes to the following 
decision.: * * * (Before reading the decision as contained in the fol- 
lowing paragraph, make one of your own.) 

Answer. To have only an advance party with which to throw forward 
a point of 5 men 200 yards to the front and send out flankers, as needed 
(Par. 56, p. 57) ; to send the three mounted orderlies well to the front 
of the point to gain early information of the enemy, especially on Han- 
cock Hill (ji') and the ridge to the north of 11 (//'). 

Required, 2. Sergeant B's order. (Par. 33, p. 43.) 

Answer. Given verbally to the platoon and mounted orderlies, at 9 :30 
P. M. 

"The enemy's cavalry patrols were seen at F (qh') today; no hostile 
infantry is on this side of the Missouri River. The battalion will move 
tomorrow to Fort Leavenworth, leaving 19 (ja') at 6:30 A. M. 

"This platoon and orderlies B, C and D will form the advance guard, 
and will start from the hedge 400 yards east of 19 at 6 :30 A. M. via the 17 
(;V)— 15 (jg')—5 (lm') road. 

"The point, Corporal Smith and 4 men of his squad, will precede the re- 
mainder of the advance guard at 200 yards. 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 103 

"I will be with the advance party. Private X and Y will act as con- 
necting files with the main body." 

The flankers will be sent out from time to time by Sergeant B as neces- 
sary. 

Required, 3. The flankers sent out by Sergeant B between 19 (ja') and 

15 (;>')• 

Artswer. A patrol of 3 men is sent to Hill 900 southeast of 19 (ja'), 
thence by Moss (kc') and Taylor (lc') houses to Hill 840 east of Taylor, 
thence to join at 15 (jg'). 

Two men are sent from the advance party as it passes Hill 875.5 (ie') 
to the top of this hill to reconnoiter to the front and northeast. These 
men return to the road and join after the advance party has reached Salt 
Creek. Two men are sent ahead of the advance party at a double time to 
take position on 'Hill 875 northeast of J. E. Daniels' place (//') and rec- 
onnoiter to the northeast and east. 

Reasons. The patrol sent out on the south moves out far enough to get 
a good view from the hills from which an enemy could observe or fire into 
the column. There is no necessity of sending out flankers north of the 
road at first, because from the road itself a good view is obtained. Hills 
875.5 and 875 give splendid points for observing all the ground to the 
north and east. (Don't send Hankers out unless they are necessary.) 

Required, 4. When the advance party reaches J. E. Daniels' house (je') 
a civilian leaves the house and starts toward 15. What action does Ser- 
geant B take? 

Required, 5. When the advance party reaches Salt Creek bridge (jg') 
the point signals "enemy in sight," and Private H reports that he saw 
about 6 or 8 mounted men ride up to the edge of the woods at Kern, halt 
a moment, and disappear. What action does Sergeant B take? 

Answer. He at once sends a message back by Private H stating the 
facts. He then orders the advance party to move forward, hastens up to 
the point and directs it to continue the march, seeking cover of fences and 
ravines and hill top. 

Required, 6. When the point reaches Schroeder (jh') it receives fire 
from the orchard at Kern. What action is taken? 

Answer. The men in the point are moved rapidly down the hill and gain 
shelter in the ravines leading toward Kern. Two squads are rapidly 
placed in line along the ridge west of Schroeder and under cover of their 
fire the remainder of the advance party run down the hill at 10 yards dis- 
tance to join the point. A squad of this force is then hurried forward to 



104 CHAPTER V. 

the Kern house. Here the squad is stopped by fire and Sergeant B de- 
ploys two more squads which advance by rushes and drive out the enemy, 
found to be 10 cavalrymen. The squads left at Schroeder now join at 
double time and the advance party moves forward, without having delayed 
the march of the main body. 

Problem No. 4 (Infantry). 

Situation: 

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on 
the line Pope Hill (sm') — National cemetery (pk') — E (qJi'). A Red 
force is reported to have reached Soldiers' Home (3 miles south of Leav- 
enworth) from the south at 7:00 o'clock this morning. Corporal A is 
directed by Sergeant B, in command of the left support at Rabbit Point 
(tn'), to take out a patrol toward the waterworks and south along the 
Esplanade (xo') to the Terminal Bridge. 

Required, i. Give Sergeant B's orders to Corporal A. 

Answer. "The enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home at 7 :00 
o'clock this morning. Another patrol will advance along Grant avenue 
(ton'). 

"Our outposts will remain here for the day. 

"Select from the first section a patrol and reconnoiter this road (Farra- 
gut avenue) as far as the waterworks {vn'), thence by Esplanade to the 
Terminal Bridge, and report on the ground in our front. When you reach 
the Terminal Bridge return if no enemy is seen. 

"Send reports here." 

Required, 2. How many men does Corporal A select, and why? (Par. 
30, p. 42.) 

Answer. Five men are taken because the patrol is to reconnoiter, not to 
fight, and on account of the distance to go and lack of information of the 
enemy, 2 or 3 messages may have to be sent. 

Required, 3. What equipment should Corporal A have? (Par. 31, p. 42.) 

Required, 4. State the points to be noted by Corporal A in selecting his 
patrol and what inspection does he make? (Par. 34, p. 44.) 

Answer. He selects privates C, D, E, F and G, on account of their 
bravery, attention to duty and discretion. He directs them to carry 
one meal in their haversacks, full canteen and fifty rounds of ammuni- 
tion. He then inspects them as to their physical condition, sees that they 
have proper equipment and that nothing to rattle or glisten is carried. 

Required, 5. What does Corporal A next do? (Par. 35, p. 44.) 



, THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 105 

Answer. He gives them their instructions as follows : "The enemy, 
strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home (about three miles south of 
Leavenworth) at 7 o'clock this morning. There will be a friendly patrol 
along that road (pointing to Grant avenue). We are to reconnoiter along 
this road and down toward that bridge (pointing). Be very careful not 
to be seen, take advantage of all cover, and keep touch with C and my- 
self on this road at the point of the patrol. In case we get separated meet 
at the waterworks (zm')." 

He then explains the signals to be used, and moves the patrol in close 
order out along the road until it passes the sentinel at the bridge XV 
(«»')> to whom he gives the direction to be taken by the patrol. 

Required, 6. Upon leaving XV, what formation would the patrol take, 
and reasons for same. (Par. 37, p. 45.) 

Anszver. Corporal A and Private C form the point on the road leading 
southwest of the waterworks ; Private D moves on the left overlooking the 
railroad; Private E moves promptly up Corral creek (um') to the top of 
Grant Hill (um') to observe the country toward the southwest; Private 
F moves about 50 yards in rear of the point, followed at 50 yards by Pri- 
vate G. 

Corporal A forms his patrol as stated because of the necessity of get- 
ting a view from the hill on each side. Only one man is sent out on each 
side because they can be plainly seen by the patrol on the road, and no 
connecting file is necessary. The distances taken along the road assure 
at least one man's escape, and Corporal A is in front to get a good view 
and to signal the flankers. 

Problem No. 5 (Infantry). 

Situation: 

The head of the patrol is now at the bridge, XVI (un') northwest of 
the waterworks. 

Private E has reached the top of Grant Hill and signals the enemy in 
sight ; the patrol halts and Corporal A moves out to meet Private E who 
is coming down toward the patrol. He says he saw three mounted men 
ride up to Grant and Metropolitan avenues (wm') from the south and 
after looking north a moment move west. 

Required, I. Corporal A's action. (Pars. 44 and 45, pp. 48 and 52.) 

Answer. Corporal A at once writes the following message and sends 
it back by Private E: 



106 ' CHAPTER V. 

"No. 1. Patrol, Company B, 

Farragut Avenue, 
Northwest of Waterworks, 
To Commander Blue Left Support, 10 May, '09, 8:30 A. M. 

Rabbit Point. 

Three mounted Reds, seen by Private E. just now reconnoitered at Grant 
and Metropolitan avenues ; they are moving west on Metropolitan avenue ; 
the patrol will continue toward the Terminal Bridge. 

■ A, 
Corporal. 

Reasons. The message is sent because this is the first time the enemy 
has been seen, and they have not been reported north of Soldiers' Home 
before. The message should state who saw the enemy, and the man see- 
ing them should always carry the message telling of the facts. The patrol 
would not allow this small hostile patrol to stop its advance, but would 
proceed on its route cautiously to avoid being seen, and to see if the Red 
cavalrymen are followed by others of the enemy. 

Required, 2. Give the method of reconnoitering the buildings at the 
waterworks and coal mine. (Par. 61, p. 58.) 

Answer. Private D carefully examines the east side of the enclosures 
and buildings, while Private C examines the west side. The remainder 
of the patrol halts concealed in the cut west of the north enclosure, until 
C and D signal no enemy in sight, whereupon the patrol moves forward 
along the road (XV — 3rd St.) C and D advancing rapidly between the 
buildings to the town where they join the patrol. 

Required, 3. Give the route followed by E from Grant Hill to the edge 
of Leavenworth. 

Answer. He moves down the east slope of Grant Hill to the ravine just 
east of the old R. R. bed («m') being careful to keep concealed from the 
direction of Leavenworth. He moves up the ravine, keeping a sharp look- 
out to the front, and moving rapidly until abreast, if he has fallen behind. 
He takes the branch ravine lying just west of Circus Hill (vm'), and 
moves up to its end. Here he halts and makes careful inspection of Me- 
tropolitan avenue and the street south into the city. Being sure the coast 
is clear, he darts across the narrow ridge south of Circus Hill to the 
ravine to the east and then joins the patrol. He reports to Corporal A 
any indication of the enemy he may have seen. 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 107 

Problem No. 6 (Infantry). 

Situation: 

A Blue force holds Fort Leavenworth (om') in hostile country. Out- 
posts occupy the line Salt Creek Hill (gh') — 13 (if) — Sheridan's Drive, 
(;///') against the Reds advancing from the northwest. 

At 4:30 P. M. June 25th, Sergeant A is given the following orders by 
Captain B, commanding the support : 

"The enemy will probably reach Kickapoo late today. Our outposts ex- 
tend as far north as Salt Creek Hill. There were six of our men prison- 
ers at 45 (dc') this afternoon at 1 o'clock, being held by 15 home guards 
at Kickapoo. Take . . . men from the company and move to Kickapoo, 
recapture the prisoners and gain all the information you can of the enemy 
north of there." 

Required, i. How many men does Captain B name, and why? (Par. 
30, p. 42.) 

Answer. Thirty men are assigned. 

Reason. This is twice as many as the enemy holding the prisoners, and 
to secure secrecy no larger force than is absolutely necessary should be 
taken. This force will allow men to surround the enemy while the re- 
mainder rush them. 

Required, 2. Give the order of Sergeant A to his patrol. (See 6th re- 
quirement Problem 4, p. 105, and Par. 37, p. 45.) 

Required, j. What route will the patrol take. 

Answer. 11 (//') — 13 (if)— Salt Creek Hill (gh')— and along the edge 
of the woods east of the M. P. R. R. (fg') as far as the bridge opposite 
Kickapoo Hill — thence up Kickapoo Hill toward 45 (dc'). 

Reasons. Since the patrol's orders do not require any reconnaissance 
before reaching Kickapoo the shortest and most practical route is chosen. 
The route as far as Salt Creek Hill lies behind our outpost line and is thus 
protected. The main roads are avoided because they will.be carefully 
watched by the enemy. The edge of the woods east of the M. P. Ry. (be- 
ginning about ff') gives good cover and by moving to the bridge the pa- 
trol can probably sneak close in on the enemy and capture them by sur- 
prise. 

Problem No. 7 (Infantry). 

Situation : 

The patrol reaches the top of Kickapoo Hill (cd'). Sergeant A and 
Private C move cautiously to the top and see the six prisoners in the cem- 



108 CHAPTER V. 

etery (cd') just west of Kickapoo Hill, and a Red sentinel at each corner. 
Just west of the cemetery are about 10 more Reds. No others are visible. 

Required, I. What decision does Sergeant A make and what does he do? 

Answer. He decides to capture the enemy by surprise. He leaves Pri- 
vate C to watch and, moving cautiously back to his patrol, makes the fol- 
lowing dispositions : Corporal D with 10 men to move up to Private C and 
cover the enemy, remaining concealed. He takes the remainder of the 
patrol with fixed bayonets around the northeast slope of Kickapoo Hill in 
the woods and moves up the ravine toward 29. When his detachment ar- 
rives within about 100 yards of the enemy, they charge bayonet and rush 
them. Corporal D's party at the same time rush in from the opposite side. 
(Note: The enemy are demoralized by the surprise and are captured with- 
out a shot being fired.) 

Required, 2. What action docs Sergeant A now take? 

Answer. He causes the enemy to be kept apart while he and his non- 
commissioned officers question them separately. He then questions the 
Blue prisoners, and furnishing them the guns taken from the Reds, sends 
them and the captured Reds back to our line under Corporal D, with a 
written message giving the information secured from his questions. (Par. 
49, p. 55.) 

Required, 3. What does he then do? 

Answer. Places his main body in concealment at the Cemetery {cd') 
and sends a patrol under Corporal H via 35 — 41 — 43, and one under Cor- 
poral F via 29 — 27 — 23 west to learn further' of the enemy in execution 
of the second part of his orders. 

The patrol under Corporal H sends back the following message : 

No. 1 Patrol Company A, 1st Infantry, 

21 June, '09; 5:30 P. M. 
Commander Expeditionary Patrol at 45 : 

A column of infantry is moving east about 1 mile west of Schweizer 
(aa') ; about 800 yards in front of this body is another small body with 8 
to 10 men 300 yards still farther east. It took the main body 2 min. 45 
sec. to pass a point on the road. I remain in observation. 

H, 
Corporal." 

Required 3. The size of the command reported by Corporal H and its 
formation. (Par. 47-b, p. 53.) 
Answer. One battalion infantry (512 men), preceded by 1 section at ad- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 109 

vance guard. The advance guard having only advance party and point, 
2}i minutes X 175 = 481 men in the main body, leaving about 32 men for 
the advance guard. 

Problem No. 8 (Infantry). 

General Situation. 

A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on 
the line Pope Hill (sm') National Cemetery (qk') — E (qi r ). A Red force 
moving north reached Soldiers' Home at 7 o'clock this morning. 
Special Situation: 

Corporal B is chosen by Sergeant A, commander of the right support 
at the National Cemetery, to take a patrol south as far as 20th street (yf) 
and Metropolitan avenue {wh') f to report on the ground along the route, 
and to reconnoiter the enemy. A friendly patrol moves along Sheridan's 
Drive (i) — Atchison Hill (rg') — Southwest Hill (ue'), and one on Prison 
Lane (rk f ). 

Required, i. Sergeant A's orders, verbatim (that is, word for word). 

2. Give the various details attended to by Corporal B before 

he moves out with his patrol, 
j. What is the formation of the patrol when its point is at 

E (qh'). 

4. When the patrol reaches 14 (ug'), how are the intersecting 

roads reconnoitered? 

5. Four mounted men are seen riding west at a walk at 64 

(wh'). What action does Corporal A take? 

6. Describe the ground passed over by the patrol. 

Problem No. 9 (Infantry). 

Situation: 

The enemy is moving east toward Frenchman (oc f ) and is expected to 
reach there early tomorrow. A company at 72 (uj') forms the left support 
of an outpost in hostile country, on the line 70 (vj') — National Cemetery 
(#/'). At 4 P. M. Sergeant A is ordered to take a patrol of 12 men and 
go to Frenchman and destroy the bridge there, and remain in observation 
in that vicinity all night. 

Required, 1. His orders to the patrol. 

2. The route the patrol will follow, and its formation cross- 
ing the Atchison Hill — Government Hill ridge. 



no CHAPTER V. 

3. Give the conduct of the patrol from Atchison Hill (rg') — 
Government Hill (//"') to its position at the bridge at 
Frenchman. 

General Situation: 

A Blue squadron is camped for the night at Waterworks (vn'), Fort 
Leavenworth, and has outposts on the line XIV (mm') — Grant Hill (um') 
— Prison Hill (wk'). A Red force is reported to be advancing from the 
north on Kickapoo (cb'). 

Problem, No. 10 (Cavalry). 

Special Situation.' 

Lieutenant A, commanding the left support on Prison Hill, at 5 P. M., 
directs Sergeant Jones to take a patrol of 5 men from, his platoon and 
move via Atchison Cross (ug') to the vicinity of Kickapoo and secure in- 
formation of any enemy that may be in that locality. Another patrol is 
to go via Fort Leavenworth (oV). 

Required, 1. The order given by Lieutenant A, verbatim. (Pars. 33 and 
35.) 

Answer. "Sergeant Jones, the enemy is north of Kickapoo, moving on 
that place. The squadron will remain here tonight; Sergeant B will take 
a patrol through Fort Leavenworth. 

"Select a patrol of 5 men from your platoon and move out via French- 
man's (oc') toward Kickapoo. 

"Secure any information you can of the enemy in that locality. 

"Report on the condition of the bridges between here and 47 (fa"). 

"You may have to stay out over night. 

"Send messages here." 

Sergeant Jones selects five good men, directs them to take one cooked 
ration each and canteen full of water. He inspects the men and horses 
carefully ; sees that no horse of conspicuous color or that neighs is taken. 
Explains the orders to his men, etc., as was done in the infantry patrol. 

Required, 2. What route does the patrol take, and why? 

Answer. Metropolitan avenue (w) — 70 (vj') — 72 (vj') — 14 (ug') — 
Frenchman (oc') — 17 (jc') — 47 (ec'). Reasons. The enemy is distant and 
Kickapoo, the objective of the patrol, is seen from the map, which Ser- 
geant Jones has, to be over an hour's ride at a walk and trot. It is not at 
all probable that the enemy will be met until the patrol reaches the vicinity 
of Kickapoo and Sergeant Jones decides to take the shortest and best road 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. Ill 

though it is a main highway, instead of Sheridan's Drive (j) or the F 
(qg')— 15 (jg') Jane. 

It is always well for a patrol to avoid main highways when the enemy 
is near, especially in hostile country, but here the time saved more than 
justifies the use of the direct route. 

Problem No. 11 (Cavalry). 

Same situation as Problem 1. 

Required, i. The formation and conduct of the patrol as far as French- 
man's. 

Answer. Sergeant Jones determines to move at a walk and trot (5 miles 
per hour) in order to reach the vicinity of Kickapoo and take up a position 
of observation before night. Sergeant Jones and Private B are in the 
lead, 2 men about 100 yards to the rear, the remaining 2 men about 75 
yards in the rear of these. They move out at a trot along the road until 
Atchison Cross is reached. The two cross roads are reconnoitered with- 
out halting the patrol, in as much as from the cross roads a good view is 
had north and south. 

From Atchison Cross to 16 (sf) the patrol moves at a walk, being up a 
slope from 4 to 6 degrees. Usually such a place would be rushed through, 
but the distance of the enemy makes this unnecessary. No scouting is 
done off the road through the woods, because of the distance of the enemy. 
On reaching the top of the hill the patrol is halted while Sergeant Jones 
moves up to the high ground south of the road at the crest, and in con- 
cealment searches with his glasses the road as far as Frenchman's, espe- 
cially the village beyond G (qf)- Seeing no signs of the enemy he moves 
the patrol down the hill at a walk until the cut is passed and there takes 
a fast trot, so as to avoid being long in a position where they could be seen 
from the direction of Kickapoo. The same formation and gait are main- 
tained as far as Gauss' (pd') } where a walk is taken to rest the horses and 
to gain opportunity to see if any enemy are holding the bridge at French- 
man's. 
Situation: 

Just as the patrol comes to a walk Sergeant Jones sees what appears to 
be a dismounted patrol moving south over the ridge about 650 yards north 
of Frenchman's. He can see three men. 

Required, 2. Action taken by Sergeant Jones. 

Answer. The patrol is moved into the orchard just off the road, while 



112 CHAPTER V. 

Sergeant Jones moves quickly to the top of the hill and, concealed by the 
trees, examines the road north to see if the 3 men are followed by others 
forming part of a larger patrol or of a column. He finds the three men 
are not followed. 

Required, 3. What does he do next? 

Answer. He determines to capture the patrol by surprise. He has the 
horses led over south of the orchard hill so as not to be visible to the 
enemy. He then distributes his men along the north edge of the orchard, 
himself nearest the bridge, 2 men 75 yards back along the road toward G 
(qf), then 2 men 75 yards farther along toward G. As the third man 
comes opposite him, Sergeant Jones cries "Halt" which is the signal for 
the other parties to similarly hold up their men. 

Reasons. Sergeant Jones might either capture the hostile patrol or let it 
pass, and then proceed on his road. Since they are the first enemy seen 
and there is such a good chance to capture them, and as they may furnish 
definite information of the enemy's main force, he decides as stated. There 
is an objection in capturing them that he will have to send one or two 
men to take them to camp. The patrol is placed as described above so as 
to have two men opposite each of the enemy, except for Sergeant Jones, 
who is alone. By thus covering each man of the hostile patrol by two of 
our men, they will at once see the folly of an effort to escape and no shot 
need be fired. One man is holding the horses. 

Problem No. 12 (Cavalry). 

Required: 

1. What action does Sergeant Jones take before leaving the vicinity of 
Frenchman's. 

2. Give the formation and conduct of the patrol after leaving here. 

3. Give the report submitted by Sergeant Jones under his instructions 
in regard to bridges. (Par. 65, p. 59.) 

At 6:30 P. M. (it is dark at 7:30) the patrol reaches 17 (jc'). 

4. Give the route followed from here and the disposition of the patrol 
made for the night. 

Problem No. 13 (Cavalry). 

The Missouri River is the boundary between hostile countries. 
A Blue separate brigade (3 regiments infantry, 1 squadron cavalry, 1 
battery field artillery) is moving from Winchester (19 miles west of Leav- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 113 

enworth) to seize the Rock Island bridge (q) across the Missouri River 
at Fort Leavenworth. The cavalry squadron is camped at Lowemont, 8 
miles west of Leavenworth, for night June 4-5. At 3 P. M. Sergeant 
Jones is directed to take a patrol of six men and move via the Rock Island 
bridge into Missouri and gain information of the enemy reported to be 
now just east of the river. 

Required, I. Give the formation of the patrol when it first comes on the 
map. 

Required, 2. Give the conduct of the patrol from Motrin's (oa') to G 

(qf). 

At Frenchman's, Sergeant Jones met a farmer coming from Fort Leaven- 
worth, who said about 200 hostile cavalry were seen just east of the Mis- 
souri about 2 P. M., moving towards the Terminal Bridge (z). 

Required, j. Action of Sergeant Jones. (Does he hold the man? Does 
he send a message? Does he change his plans or direction of march?) 

The patrol reaches the top of the hill, Sheridan's Drive — Government 
Hill (tf). 

Required, 4. What action does Sergeant Jones take before proceeding 
east? 

FLANK GUARDS. 

99. The flanks of a column are ordinarily protected by the advance 
guard, which sends out patrols to carefully examine the country on both 
sides of the line of march. In some cases, however, the direction of 
march of the column is such that there is great danger of the enemy's 
striking it in flank and some special provision is necessary to furnish addi- 
tional security on the threatened flank. This is done by having a detach- 
ment, called a Hank guard, march off the exposed flank. The flank guard 
usually follows a road, parallel to the one on which the column is march- 
ing and at least 1,000 yards (effective rifle range) beyond it. If hostile 
artillery is feared this distance is much greater. 

The flank guard regulates its march so as to continue abreast of the 
advance guard of the main column. It takes a formation similar to an ad- 
vance guard, does most of its patrolling to the front and on the exposed 
flank, and keeps in constant touch with the main column by means of 
mounted or dismounted messengers. 

In case the enemy is encountered the flank guard drives him off if 
practicable or takes up a defensive position, protecting the march of the 
main column, and preventing the enemy from disturbing the latter's march. 



114 



CHAPTER V. 
REAR GUARD. 



100. Definition and Duties. A rear guard is a detachment of a 
marching column following in rear to protect the main column from being 
surprised and to prevent the march from being delayed or interrupted. 

101. When the main column is marching towards the enemy the rear 
guard is very small and its duties relatively unimportant. It is princi- 
pally occupied in gathering up stragglers. 

102. When the main column is marching away from the enemy {retreat- 
ing) the rear guard is all important. 1\ covers the retreat of the main 
body, preventing the enemy from harassing or delaying its march. 

103. Strength. The strength of a rear guard is slightly greater than 
that of an advance guard, as it cannot expect, like the latter, to be rein- 
forced in case it is attacked, as the main column is marching away from 
it and avoiding a fight. 

Form of Order. The rear guard commander, on the receipt of the re- 
treat order, issues a rear guard order, according to the following general 
form : 



Field Orders 
No 

Troops 



(a) 



(b) 



(c) 



(d) 



Reserve — in 
order of march 
(Troops) 
Support: 
(Commander) 

(Troops) 

Rear Cavalry: 

(Commander) 

(Troops) 

Right (left) 

Flank Guard: 

(Commander) 

(Troops) 



(Title) ) 

(Place) \ 

(Date and hour) J 

1. (Information of enemy and of our supporting troops.) 

2. (Plan of commander — duty of rear guard.) 

3. (a) (Instructions for reserve — place and time of de- 
parture, or approximate distance from main body — recon- 
naissance.) 

(b) (Instructions for support — place and time of de- 
parture or distance from reserve — any special reconnais- 
sance.) 

(c) (Instructions for rear cavalry — place and time of 
departure, road or country to be covered — special mission.) 

(d) (Instructions for flank guard — place and time of 
departure, route, special mission.) 



4. (Instructions for field train when necessary — usually to join train of 
main body.) 

5. (Place of commander or where messages may be sent.) 



(Signature.) 



(How and to whom issued.) 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 115 

104. The distance of a rear guard from the main body and its 
formation are similar to those of an advance guard. The elements cor- 
responding to the advance cavalry, the point, and the advance party of an 
advance guard are termed the rear cavalry, rear point and rear party, re- 
spectively. The support and reserve retain the same designations. 

105. A rear guard formed during an engagement to cover the 
withdrawal or retreat of the main body, may first be compelled to take 
up a defensive position behind which the main body forms up and moves 
off. It may be forced to withdraw from this position by successive skir- 
mish lines, gradually forming up in column on the road as it clears itself 
from fighting contact with the enemy. # 

106. The rate of march of the rear guard depends upon that of the 
main body. The main body may be much disorganized and fatigued, 
necessitating long halts and a slow marching rate. 

107. Action of the Rear Guard. The withdrawal of defeated troops 
is delayed, if possible, until night. If it becomes necessary to begin a re- 
treat while an engagement is in progress, the rear guard is organized and 
takes up a defensive position generally behind the fighting line; the latter 
then falls back and assembles under cover of the rear guard. 

The rear cavalry gives away before the enemy's pursuit only when abso- 
lutely necessary, maintains communication with and sends information to 
the rear guard commander, and pays special attention to the weak points 
in the retreat, namely, the flanks. It makes use of every kind of action of 
which it is capable, according to the situation, and unless greatly outnum- 
bered by hostile cavalry, it causes considerable delay to the enemy. 

When the enemy is conducting an energetic pursuit the rear guard ef- 
fects its withdrawal by taking up a succession of defensive positions (that 
is, where the nature of the ground enables the rear guard to defend itself 
well) and compelling the enemy to attack or turn them. (It should be 
understood that these successive defensive positions must, in the case of a 
large force, be from two to four miles apart and in the case of a small 
force at least one-half mile apart — not a few hundred yards as is fre- 
quently attempted in peace maneuvers.) 

When the enemy's dispositions for attack are nearly completed, the rear 
guard begins to fall back, the cavalry on the flanks being usually the last 
to leave. The commander designates a part of the rear guard to cover 
the withdrawal of the remainder; the latter then falls back to a new po- 
sition in rear, and in turn covers the withdrawal of the troops in front. 



116 CHAPTER V. 

These operations compel the enemy continually to deploy or make turning 
movements, and constantly retard his advance. 

The pursuit may be further delayed by obstacles placed in the enemy's 
path ; bridges are burned or blown up ; boats removed or destroyed ; fords 
and roads obstructed; tracks torn up; telegraph lines cut, and houses, 
villages, woods and fields fired. Demolitions and obstructions are pre- 
pared by engineers, assisted, if necessary, by other troops detailed from 
the reserve, and are completed by the mounted engineers of the rear party 
at the last moment. 

The instructions of the supreme commander govern in the demolition 
of important structures. 

OUTPOSTS. 

108. Definition and Duties. An outpost is a detachment of a sta- 
tionary (encamped or bivouacked) force thrown out in the direction of 
the enemy to protect the main body from being surprised and to insure its 
undisturbed rest. It is in reality merely a stationary advance guard. 

Specifically its duties are : 

(a) To observe towards the front and flanks by patrols and stationary 
sentinels, in order to locate the enemy's whereabouts and learn promptly 
of his movements, if near. 

(b) To prevent the main body from being observed or disturbed. 

(c) In case of attack to check the enemy long enough to enable the 
main body to make the necessary dispositions. 

109. The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing", but they 
should avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the com- 
mand. Firing disturbs the rest of the troops and if frequently indulged 
in ceases to be a warning. No trumpet signals, except "to arms" or "to 
horse," are sounded, and all unnecessary noises are avoided. 

110. The strength of the outpost varies with conditions of ground 
and proximity (nearness) to the enemy, but rarely exceeds one-sixth of 
the entire command, and should be as small as safety will permit. Troops 
at a halt are supposed to be resting, night or day, and the fewer on out- 
post the more troops will there be resting, thus increasing their strength 
for prospective marches and encounters with the enemy. Furthermore, 
outpost duty is the most fatiguing work a soldier performs, particularly 
as the outpost for the afternoon and night is usually taken from the ad- 
vance guard of the morning, which has already performed a trying tour 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 



117 






of duty. It is, therefore, evident that the commander should use careful 
judgment in determining the strength of the outpost and the chiefs of the 
various outpost subdivisions should be equally careful in disposing their 
men so as to permit the greatest possible number to sleep undisturbed, but 
always considering the safety of the main body as the chief duty. 

111. The distance at which, the outpost is established beyond the 
camp or bivouac of the main body depends largely on the strength 
and composition of the command. The larger the command, the greater 
the distance — two to three miles in the case of a division, where the out- 
post must be sufficiently far to the front to prevent hostile artillery from 
firing into the camp. In small commands the distance is greatly reduced, 
being sufficient to prevent observation of the camp by the enemy and to 
give time for the main body to form up and deploy in case of attack. 

Examples of strength of outposts and distance to main body: 

Distance (yds.) 
(From reserve of 
outpost to the 
main body.) 
500 to 1,000 
1,000 to 1,500 
500 to 1,000 
1,000 to 1,500 
800 to 1,500 
1,200 to 1,800 



Command 
Inf. y?_ company (50 men) 
Cav. t/i troop (45 men) 
Inf. company of 108 men 
Cav. troop of 86 men 
Infantry battalion 
Cavalry squadron 



Outpost 

1 squad 
8 men 

2 squad*. 
16 men 

J / 2 tol company 
Yz to 1 troop 



These are not furnished as fixed numbers and distances, but are merely 
to give the student an approximate, concrete idea. 

112. Small Commands. In very small commands, as a platoon, for 
example, the outpost really consists principally of moving and stationary 
patrols and has little power of actual resistance, serving primarily to give 
timely warning of a hostile advance. If it can possibly be avoided, a unit 
(squad, platoon, company or battalion) should never be split up in form- 
ing a group. 

113. If cavalry forms part of the outpost the demands on the 
outpost infantry, particularly as to patrolling, are much reduced during 
the day ; also at night, if cavalry patrols remain well out to the front. 



118 CHAPTER V. 

Formation of Outposts. 

114. Subdivisions. As in the case of an advance guard, the outpost 
of a large force like a brigade or division is subdivided into a number of 
groups or elements, gradually increasing in size from front to rear. In 
case of sudden attack, each group is charged with holding the enemy in 
check until the larger element, next in rear, has time to deploy and pre- 
pare for action. As has already been fully explained, the smaller the com- 
mand, the fewer the subdivisions. 

Subdivisions of an Outpost. 

Distance to next 

element in rear. 

Advance cavalry 2 to 6 miles 

C Sentinels (furnished by outguard) 20 to 40 yds. 

Outguards — formerly called "pickets" (gener- 
( Generally^ ^ mQre than Qn ^ 200 to 500 yds. 

| Support proper (furnishes majority of pa- 
more) ^ trols ^ 400 to 800yds 

Reserve (usually omitted in small commands) J A to 2 miles 

(The distances vary principally with the size of the command and the 
character of the country.) 

1. In front, reconnoitering towards the enemy, is the advance cavalry; 

2. Then comes the line of observation occupied by the outguards, with 
their sentinels a short distance in front ; 

3. In rear of the line of observation is the line of resistance (the best 
defensive position in the immediate vicinity), on or near which the main 
bodies of the supports are posted, and which becomes the first line of 
battle if the enemy makes a determined advance; 

4. In rear of the line of resistance, centrally located, is the reserve; 

5. Still further in rear is the main body. 

The nature of the country may cause the line of observation practically 
to coincide with the line of resistance. It is also possible for the line of 
resistance to be in advance of the line of observation; for example, a low 
range of hills crossing the enemy's line of advance might be occupied by 
placing trenches along the foot to secure a grazing fire, sentinels to watch 
for the enemy's approach being posted along the crest in rear. 

115. The advance cavalry is tha| part of the outpost sent out in 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 119 

front of all foot troops. It generally operates two to six miles beyond 
the outpost infantry, reconnoitering far to the front and flanks in order 
to guard the camp against surprise by artillery fire and to give early in- 
formation of the enemy's movements. 

After dusk the bulk of the cavalry usually withdraws to a camp in rear 
of the outpost reserve, where it can rest securely after the day's hard 
work and the horses can be fresh for the next day. Several mounted pa- 
trols are usually left for the night at junctions or forks on the principal 
roads to the front, from one to four miles beyond the infantry line of 
observation. 

116. Supports — (a) The supports constitute the principal elements 
or groups of an outpost, and in outposts consisting of a battalion or more 
they usually comprise about one-half the infantry. In outposts of com- 
mands of a regiment or less the technical designation "support" includes 
the entire outpost, the main body being the real reserve. 

(b) The supports are numbered from right to left and definitely as- 
signed to the section or amount of front they are to cover. As each sup- 
port arrives upon the ground it is to occupy, its commander (who should 
precede it when practicable, and make a rapid examination of the ground), 
sends out patrols to give temporary security, and then sends out observa- 
tion groups, varying in size from four men to a platoon, generally a squad, 
to watch the country in the direction of the enemy. These groups are 
called outguards and are just sufficient in number to cover the front of the 
supports and to connect, where necessary, with the outguards of adjoining 
supports. 

The line occupied by the outguards is the line of observation. 

(c) After establishing the outguards the commander selects a defensive 
position on the general line of resistance, from which not only can he 
command the approaches but where he can also give assistance to the 
adjoining supports; he then gives instructions in regard to the intrench- 
ments and obstacles, after which makes a more careful reconnaissance of 
the section assigned him; corrects the position of the outguards, if neces- 
sary; gives them instructions as to their duties in case of attack or when 
strangers approach their posts; points out lines of retreat in case they 
are compelled to fall back to the supports, selects, if necessary, places for 
additional posts to be occupied at night or during fog; sees that suitable 
connections are made between him and the adjoining outguards, and be- 
tween his support and the adjoining supports; and questions subordinate 
commanders to test their grasp of the situation and knowledge of their 



120 CHAPTER V. 

duties. On returning to the support he sends a report with a sketch to 
the outpost commander, showing the dispositions made. 

After the line of observation has been established, the support stacks 
arms and the men are permitted to remove their equipments, except car- 
tridge belts. One or more sentinels are posted over these supports, and 
they guard the property and watch for signals from the outguards. Fires 
are concealed as much as possible and the messing is done by reliefs. 
Mounted messengers ordinarily do not unsaddle; they rest, water and 
feed as directed. 

(d) There are generally two- or more supports, as the enemy must 
usually confine his movements to the roads, particularly in the case of de- 
tachments of a company or more, the supports are usually posted on the 
roads leading in the direction of the enemy. Just in rear of where a road 
forks to the front is the best location, as it covers both roads from one 
position. Of course, the support may bivouac under cover just off the 
road, with its sentinel posted at the roadside. 

What follows regarding sentinels and detached posts, patrols and out- 
guards, is of particular importance to noncommissioned officers, as it deals 
with the elements of the outpost that they command. 

117. The following patrols are usually sent out from the main bodies of 
the supports: 

(a) Patrols of from three men to a squad are sent along the roads and 
trails in the direction of the enemy, for a distance of from one to five 
miles, depending on how close the enemy is supposed to be, whether or 
not there is any advance cavalry out, and how long the outpost has been 
in position. The extreme right and left supports send patrols well out 
on the roads to the flanks. These patrols generally operate continuously ; 
as soon as one returns from the front, or possibly even before it returns, 
another goes out in the same general direction to cover the same country. 
Frequently a patrol is sent out along a road to the front for two or three 
miles with orders to remain out until some stated time — for example, 4 
P. M., dusk or dawn. It sends in important information, and remains out 
near the extremity of its route, keeping a close watch on the surrounding 
country. 

An effort should always be made to secure and maintain contact with 
the enemy, if within a reasonable distance, in order that his movements 
or lack of movement may be constantly watched and reported on. The 
usual tendency is towards a failure to send these patrols far enough to 
the front and for the patrol leader to overestimate the distance he has 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 121 

traveled. A mile through strange country with the ever-present possi- 
bility of encountering the enemy, seems three miles to the novice. 

At night the patrols generally confine their movements to the roads, 
usually remaining quietly on the alert near the most advanced point of 
their route to the front. 

The majority of such patrols are sent out to secure information of the 
enemy — reconno tiering patrols — and they avoid fighting and hostile pa- 
trols, endeavoring to get in touch with the enemy's main force. Other 
patrols are sometimes sent out to prevent hostile detachments from ap- 
proaching the outposts; they endeavor to locate the hostile patrols, drive 
them back, preventing them from gaining any vantage point from which 
they can observe the outpost line. These are called combat patrols and 
have an entirely different mission from reconnoitering patrols. 

(b) Patrols of from two men to a squad, usually two men, are sent 
from the support around the line of its outguards, connecting with the out- 
guards of the adjacent supports, if practicable. These are "visiting pa- 
trols/' and they serve to keep the outguards of a support in touch with it 
and with each other ; to keep the commander of a support in touch with 
his outguards and the adjacent supports; and to reconnoiter the ground 
between the outguards. Since a hostile force of any size is practically 
forced to keep to the roads, there are rarely ever any supports and very 
few outguards posted off the roads, the intervals being covered by pa- 
trols, as just described. 

118. Detail for patrols. Since for every patrol of four men, twelve 
are required (3 reliefs of 4 men each), the importance of sending out 
just enough men and not one more than is actually needed, can readily be 
understood. As fast as one visiting patrol completes its round, another 
should usually be sent out, possibly going the rounds by a slightly dif- 
ferent route or in the reverse direction. The same generally applies to 
the reconnoitering and combat patrols, though frequently they are sent 
out for the entire day, afternoon or night, and no 2d and 3d relief is re- 
quired. Three reliefs are required for the sentinel or sentinels at the 
post of the supports, so care should be taken to establish but one post if 
it can do all that is required. It should not be considered that every man 
in the support should be on duty or on a relief for an outguard, a patrol 
or sentinel post. There should be as many men as possible in the main 
body of a support (this term is used to distinguish this body from the 
support proper, which includes the outguards and their sentinels) who 
have no duty other than being instantly available in case of attack. 



122 CHAPTER V. 

119. Outguards. Outguards vary in size from four men to a platoon, 
but are no larger than necessary to watch the country, drive back small 
hostile patrols, and furnish reliefs for the sentinels. Outguards of eight 
men {one squad) are most convenient, as they furnish besides the cor- 
poral in command, relief for double sentinels and an extra man for mes- 
senger duty and to assist in patrolling. When only a single sentinel is 
used, as is the case in the day time, four extra men are available. Fur- 
thermore, it is preferable to use a complete unit as a squad, rather than 
to break up one 

120. Each support sends forward one or more outguards, depending on 
the extent of front it has to cover, the character of the country, number 
of roads and trails leading to the front, etc. If from one position the en- 
tire front covered by the support can be observed, one outguard with one 
sentinel would be sufficient and proper. The outguards are usually posted 
on the roads and trails leading towards the enemy and are numbered 
from right to left for each support. If the same force forms the outpost 
for more than 24 hours, the main body of the support furnishes fresh out- 
guards to relieve those which have been on duty 24 hours. The latter 
take their place with the main body of the support. If the advance guard 
for the morning march forms the outpost for the afternoon and night only, 
the outguards first posted are not relieved until the outpost is relieved. 

121. The duty of the outguards is to maintain uninterrupted ob- 
servation of the ground in front and on the flanks ; to report promptly 
hostile movements and other information relating to the enemy ; to pre- 
vent unauthorized persons from crossing the line of observation ; to drive 
off small parties of the enemy, and to make temporary resistance to larger 
bodies. 

122. When an outguard reaches the line of observation, it takes a 
concealed position where the men are allowed to rest, and posts one or 
more sentinels a few yards in advance to overlook the country. Single 
sentinels are used in open country in the day time ; double sentinels in 
close country in thick weather, at night or when special vigilance is 
necessary. 

123. The intervals between outguards and their distances from 
the supports depend upon the situation and the nature of the ground. In 
small outposts the distance from the support to outguard is from 400 to 
800 yards. The line of observation is not necessarily continuous, but 
ground over which the enemy could approach must be carefully guarded. 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 123 

At night it may be necessary to push one or more of the outguards farther 
to the front. 

124. When necessary, outguards patrol along the line of observation be- 
tween the posts; patrolling to the front is performed from the support. 
Communication with adjoining outguards and with the support is main- 
tained by means of signals, messengers or visiting patrols. 

When resting, members of the outguard keep their weapons in position 
for immediate use and do not remove their equipments. Fires are not 
permitted, unless in cold weather they become necessary, and then they 
must be concealed. 

The outpost of a small command may consist of outguards only, with- 
out supports or reserve, part of the main body remaining on the alert. 

125. Sentinels. If practicable, troops on outpost duty are concealed 
and all movements made so as to avoid observation by the enemy ; sen- 
tinels are posted so as to have a clear view to the front and if practicable 
(though it is rarely possible) to be able, by day, to see the sentinels of 
the adjoining outguards. Double sentinels are posted near enough to each 
other to be able to communicate easily in ordinary voice. 

Sentinels are generally on duty two hours out of six. For every sen- 
tinel and for every patrol there should be at least three reliefs ; there- 
fore, one-third the strength of the outguards gives the greatest number of 
men that should be on duty as sentinels and patrols at one time. 

Skillful selection of the posts of sentinels increases their field of obser- 
vation. High points, under cover, are advantageous by night as well as 
by day ; they increase the range of vision and afford greater facilities for 
seeing lights and hearing noises. Observers with good field glasses may 
be placed on high buildings, on church steeples or in high trees. 

Glittering objects on uniform or equipment should be concealed. It is 
seldom necessary to fix bayonets, except at night, in dense fog, or in very 
close country. 

Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers, approach sentinels from 
the rear, remaining under cover if possible. 

126. The instructions given a sentinel on the line of observation 

embrace the following: 

a. Where the enemy is or is supposed to be and the direction from 
which he may be expected to come ; the names of villages, streams and 
prominent features in sight and where the roads lead. 

b. The number (if any) of his post, and the number of his and the ad- 



124 CHAPTER V. 

joining outguards ; the position of the support; the line of retreat to be 
followed if the outguard is compelled to fall back; the position of ad- 
vance detachments and whether friendly patrols are operating in front. 

c. He watches to the front and Hanks without intermission, and devotes 
special attention to unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he sees indica- 
tions of the enemy, he at once notifies the commander of the outguard; 
in case of imminent danger or when an attack is made, he gives the alarm 
by firing rapidly. 

d. By day, officers, noncommissioned officers and detachments recognised 
as parts of the outposts and officers known to have authority to do so, 
are allowed to pass in and out; all others are detained and the commander 
of the outguard notified. 

e. At night, when persons approach his post, the sentinel comes to a ready, 
halts them and notifies the outguard commander; the latter challenges, 
learns who they are, and acts according to circumstances. 

f. Individuals zvho fail to halt, or otherwise disobey a sentinel, are fired 
upon after a second warning or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape. 

g. Deserters are required to lay down their arms, and a patrol is sent 
out to bring them in. Deserters pursued by the enemy are ordered to 
drop their arms and an alarm is given; if they fail to obey they are fired 
upon. 

h. Bearers of flags of truce and their escorts are halted and required to 
face outwards; they are then blindfolded and disposed of in accordance 
with instructions from the support commander. 

i. At night a sentinel stands practically in the same spot, moving about 
for purposes of observation only; he does not sit or lie down unless au- 
thorized to do so. In the day time he makes use of natural or artificial 
cover and assumes such positions as give him the best field of view. He 
informs passing patrols of what he has seen. His weapon is habitually 
loaded and locked and carried at will. 

(Note: Troops on outpost duty pay no compliments, and soldiers salute 
only when they address, or are addressed by a superior.) 

These instructions for a sentinel are not to be blindly memorised. On 
reading them over carefully it will be seen that it is all plain common 
sense and very much what any reasonable man would want to know or do 
under such circumstances. 

127. Detached Posts. Detached posts are practically the same as the 
supports of an outpost, but occupy positions at some distance from the 
general line of resistance. They may be sent out to hold points which 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 125 

are of importance to the outpost cavalry, such as a ford or a junction of 
roads; or to occupy positions especially favorable for observation, but too 
far to the front to be included in the line of observation ; or to protect 
flanks of the outpost position. Such posts are generally established by 
the outpost commander, but a support commander might find it necessary 
to establish a post practically detached from the rest of his command. 
They usually vary in strength from a squad to a platoon. 

128. Reserve. The reserve forms a general support for the line of re- 
sistance. It is therefore centrally located near the junction of roads 
coming from the direction of the enemy, and in concealment if practicable. 

Of the troops detailed for outpost duty, about one-half of the infantry, 
generally all of the artillery, and the cavalry not otherwise employed, are 
assigned to the reserve. 

The arms are stacked and the equipments (except cartridge belts) may 
be removed. Roads communicating with the supports are opened. 

When necessary, the outpost order states what is to be done in case of 
attack, designates places of assembly and provides for interior guards. 
Interior guards are posted in the camp of the reserve or main body to 
maintain order, and furnish additional security. Additional instructions 
may be given for messing, feeding, watering, etc. In the vicinity of the 
enemy or at night a portion of the infantry may be required to remain 
under arms, the cavalry to hold their horses (cinches loosened), and the 
artillery to remain in harness, or take up a combat position. 

In case of alarm, the reserve prepares for action without delay, and 
word is sent to the main body. In combat, the reserve reinforces the line 
of resistance, and if unable to check the enemy until the arrival of the 
main body, delays him as much as possible. 

The distance of the reserve from the line of resistance varies, but is 
generally about half a mile ; in outposts of four companies or less this 
distance may be as small as 400 yards. 

The distance from the main body to the reserve varies with the size of 
the former, the nature of the terrain, the situation, etc. 

129. Examining- Posts. An examining post is a small detachment 
under the command of an officer or a noncommissioned officer, stationed at 
some convenient point to examine strangers brought in by the outguards 
or patrols. When they are used, strangers approaching the line of ob- 
servation are passed along the line to an examining post. 

No one except the commander is allowed to speak to persons brought 



126 CHAPTER V. 

to an examining post. Prisoners and deserters are at once sent under 
guard to the rear. 

130. Cavalry Outpost. Independent cavalry covering a command or 
on special missions, and occasionally the advance cavalry of a mixed com- 
mand, bivouac when night overtakes them, and in such cases furnish their 
own outposts. The outposts are established, in the main, in accordance 
with the foregoing principles, care being taken to confine outpost work 
to the lowest limits consistent with safety. No precaution, however, 
should be omitted, as the cavalry is generally in close proximity to the 
enemy, and often in territory where the inhabitants are hostile. 

The line of resistance is occupied by the supports, the latter sending 
out the necessary outguards and patrols. Each outguard furnishes its 
own vedettes (mounted sentinels), or sentinels. Due to the mobility of 
cavalry, the distances are generally greater than in an outpost for a 
mixed command. An outguard of four troopers is convenient for the 
day time, but should be doubled at night, and at important points made 
even stronger. The sentinels are generally dismounted, their horses be- 
ing left with those of the outguards. 

Mounted cavalry at night can offer little resistance ; the supports and 
outguards are therefore generally dismounted, the horses being under 
cover in rear, and the positions are strengthened by intrenchments and 
obstacles. By holding villages, bridges, defiles, etc., with dismounted rifle 
fire, cavalry can greatly delay a superior force. 

There should always be easy communication along the line of resist- 
ance to enable the cavalry to concentrate at a threatened point. 

A support of one squadron covers with its outposts a section rarely 
longer than two miles. 

As such a line is of necessity weak, the principal reliance is placed on 
distant patrolling. If threatened by infantry, timely information enables 
the threatened point to be reinforced, or the cavalry to withdraw to a 
place of safety. If there is danger from hostile cavalry, the roads in 
front are blocked at suitable points, such as bridges, fords, defiles, etc., 
by a succession of obstacles and are defended by a few dismounted men. 
When compelled to fall back these men mount and ride rapidly to the 
next obstacle in rear and there take up a new position. As the march of 
cavalry at night is, as a rule, confined to roads, such tactics seriously de- 
lay its advance. 

In accordance with the situation and the orders they have received, the 
support commanders arrange for feeding, watering, cooking, resting and 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 127 

patrolling. During the night the horses of the outguards remain saddled 
and bridled. During the day time cinches may be loosened, one-third of 
the horses at a time. Feeding and watering are done by reliefs. Horses 
being fed are removed a short distance from the others. 

Independent cavalry generally remains in outpost position for the night 
only, its advance being resumed on the following day; if stopped by the 
enemy, it is drawn off to the flanks upon the approach of its own infantry. 

Establishing the Outpost. 

131. On receipt of the halt order from the commander of the main col- 
umn, naming the camp ground, the outpost commander issues the outpost 
order. This order gives the approximate line of resistance to be held, di- 
vides the outpost into its tactical components (advance cavalry, supports, 
etc.) and gives the necessary instructions for each. 

Outpost orders are issued in the following form : 

Field Orders (Title) 

No (Place) 

Troops (Date and hour) 

(a) Advance Cavalry: 1. (Information of the enemy and of our supporting troops.) 
(Commander) 

(Troops) 

(b) Support: 2. (Plan of commander — to establish outpost, approximate 
No. 1 (Commander) line of resistance.) 

(Troops) 
No. 2 (Commander) 3. (a) (Instructions for advance cavalry — contact with 
(Troops) enemy, roads or country to be specially watched, special 

mission.) 
No. 3 (Commander) (b) (Instructions for support — positions they are to 

(Troops) occupy, and sections of line of resistance which they are to 

hold, intrenching, etc.) 

(c) Detached Post: (c) (Instructions for detached posts — position to be 
(Commander) occupied, duties, amount of resistance.) 

(Troops) 

(d) Reserve: (d) (Instruction for reserve — location, observation of 
(Commander) flanks, conduct in case of attack, duties of special troops.) 

(Troops) 

4. (Instructions for field train if it has accompanied the outpost.) 

5. (Place of commander or where messages may be sent.) 

(Signature.) 
(How and to whom issued.) 

(Note: In the case of a small outpost the order is usually verbal.) 



128 CHAPTER V. 

The reserve, supports and detached posts proceed to their respective 
positions by the shortest routes, providing for their own security. 

As soon as practicable the outpost commander makes a careful inspec- 
tion of the outpost position and orders such changes in the arrangements 
as he deems necessary. As the movement of troops across country, es- 
pecially at night, is difficult, he places the supports so as to command the 
roads. For this reason, when dividing the line of resistance into sections, 
he is careful to see that the dividing lines are not on roads or where the 
enemy can readily approach. 

132. Communication. Communication between the subdivisions of an 
outpost and between the reserve and the main body, is maintained by pa- 
trols, messengers, wire and signals. 

133. Changes for the Night. In civilized warfare, it is seldom neces- 
sary to draw the outpost closer to the main body at night in order to di- 
minish the front; nor is it necessary to strengthen the line of observation, 
as the enemy's advance in force must be confined to the roads. The latter 
are therefore strongly occupied, the intervening ground being diligently 
patroled. 

In very open country or in war with savage or semi-civilized people 
familiar with the terrain, special precautions are necessary. 

134. Relieving the Outpost. Ordinarily outposts are not kept on 
duty longer than twenty-four hours. In temporary camps or bivouac they 
are generally relieved every morning. After a day's advance the outpost 
for the night is usually relieved the following morning when the support 
of the new advance guard passes the line of resistance. In retreat the out- 
post for the night usually forms the rear guard for the following day, and 
is relieved when it passes the line of observation of the new outpost. 
Evening twilight and shortly before dawn are hours of special danger. 

Outguards that have become familiar with the country during the day 
time should remain on duty that night. Sentinels are relieved once in two 
hours, or oftener, depending on the weather. The work of patrols is regu- 
lated by the support commander. 

Commanders of the various fractions of an outpost turn over their in- 
structions and special orders, written and verbal, to their successors, to- 
gether with the latest information of the enemy, and a description of the 
important features of the country. When practicable the first patrols sent 
out by the new outpost are accompanied by members of the old outpost 
who are familiar with the terrain. When relieved the old outguards re- 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 129 

turn to their supports, the supports to the reserve and the latter to the 
main body; or, if more convenient, the supports and reserves return to 
the main body independently, each by the shortest route. 

When relieved by an advance guard, the outpost troops ordinarily join 
their units as the column passes. 

OUTPOST PROBLEMS. 
Problem No. 1 (Infantry). 

Lieutenant (to two squads of his company) : Two battalions of our regi- 
ment have camped by Baker's Pond (Elementary Map) for the night. It 
is now 3 P. M. on a rainy day in August. The enemy is thought to be 
about five miles to the south of us. Our platoon is the left support of the 
outpost and is stationed at the road fork on the Chester Pike, by the 
Mason house. The Twin Hills-Lone Hill ridge is taken care of by other 
troops. Corporal Baker, where do you think I should place outguards? 

Corporal Baker-' One at the junction of the Mills farm lane and the 
Chester Pike, and one at the steel railroad trestle over Sandy Creek. 
(Pars. 116-b, 119 and 123, pp. 119 and 122.) 

Lieutenant : Those positions are both too far from the support, almost 
a half mile, but they cover the two main avenues of approach and there 
is no good place for a position nearer the support. A position farther 
north of the Mills farm lane would have its view obstructed by the wall 
and trees along the lane and the wall would be a bad thing to leave un- 
occupied such a short distance to your front. So in this case, in spite of 
the excessive distances from the support, I think the two positions are 
well chosen. Each should be an outguard of a squad, for in the day time, 
in addition to furnishing a sentinel to observe to the front, they should 
have some power of resistance, particularly at the trestle. At night they 
should each have one double sentinel post. This requires three reliefs of 
two men each, which, with the corporal, only leaves one extra man, who 
can be used as a messenger. (Par. 119, p. 122.) 

Corporal Baker, I order you to take your squad and post it as Outguard 
No. 1, at the junction of this (Chester) pike and that farm lane (Mills 
farm) in front. Corporal Davis' squad will be Outguard No. 2, at the 
railroad trestle over there (pointing). Friendly troops will be on the 
ridge to the east of your position. Your meals will be cooked here and 
sent to you. 

Explain how you post your squad. 

Corporal Baker: I order Smith to double time 150 yards to the front 



130 CHAPTER V. 

and act as point for the squad. I then march the squad down to its po- 
sition, keeping Smith about 200 yards in front until I have arranged every- 
thing. I then post Brown under cover of the trees along the lane where 
he can look down the road as far as possible (Pars. 123 and 125, pp. 122 and 
123), and I tell him, "Brown, you are to take post here, keeping a sharp 
lookout to the front and flanks. The enemy is thought to be about five miles 
south (pointing) of us. This is the Chester Pike. That creek over there is 
Sandy Creek. Salem is about a mile and three-quarters down this pike in 
that (S. E.) direction. York is a mile and a half in that (S. W.) direc- 
tion. Our troops are on that ridge (Twin Hills) and a squad is at the 
trestle over there. It is Outguard No. 2. You are in Outguard No. 1. 
You know where we left our platoon. It is our support. Signal Smith to 
come in." (Par. 126, p. 123.) I then have the squad pitch their shelter 
tents along the northern side of the wall where they will be hidden to view 
from the front by the trees along the lane and the wall. I want the men 
to get shelter from the rain as soon as possible. I then instruct the men 
of the squad, in the same manner that I did Brown ; I notice the time, and 
detail Davis as second relief and Carter as third relief for Brown's post. 

I then direct two men to take all the canteens and go over to that farm 
(Mills) and fill them, first questioning the people about the enemy and 
about the country around here. I also direct these two men to get some 
straw or hay for bedding in the shelter tents, and instruct them to return 
with as little delay as possible. 

I wait until they return and order two other men to go down to the 
cross roads, question the people there, look the ground over and return 
here. I caution them not to give any information about our force or the 
outguard. I would see that the sentinel's position was the best available 
and that the men had as comfortable quarters as possible, without being 
unduly exposed to view and without interfering with their movements in 
case of attack. They would keep their rifles at their sides at all times and 
not remove their equipments. (Par. 124, p. 123.) After dark I put two 
men on post at the same time. To do this I arrange three reliefs of two 
men each. They are posted in pairs for two -hours at a time. 

If no patrol from the support appeared within a half hour after I first 
took position I would send a messenger back to you to see if everything 
was all right and tell you what I had done. 

Lieutenant: I think the two men sent to the cross roads should have 
been started out before sending anyone to the Mills house as this was a 
more important point. The Field Service Regulations state that outguards 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 131 

do not patrol to the front, but what you did was entirely correct. You 
were securing yourself in your position and should be familiar with your 
immediate surroundings. You should have told the cross roads patrol to 
determine how much of an obstacle Sandy Creek was. I suppose you as- 
sumed the swamp was impassable. 

The sentinel in this case is, I suppose, across the lane from the out- 
guard about 10 or 15 yards in advance. After dark the double sentinel 
post should be posted on the pike about 30 yards in advance of the out- 
guard. 

Very frequently it would not be wise to put up your shelter tents on out- 
guard. But here, considering the rain and the protection the trees and 
wall furnish, it was wise to do so. 

The noncommissioned officer in charge of an outguard should be very 
precise in giving his orders and in making his arrangements, details, etc. 
The discipline must be strict; that is, the men must be kept under abso- 
lute control, so that in case of sudden attack there will be no chance of 
confusion and the outguard commander will have his men absolutely in 
hand and not permit any independent action on their part. This is often 
not the case, owing to the familiar relations that usually exist in our 
army between a corporal and the members of his squad. 

We will not have time to go into the arrangements for Outguard No. 2 
other than to say that the conditions there are somewhat different from 
those Corporal Baker has had to deal with. The outguard should be posted 
on the west bank of Sandy Creek and the sentinel at the southeastern end 
of the trestle. A skirmish trench should be dug down the western slope 
of the fill west of the creek, and extended across the track by throwing 
up a parapet about two and one-half feet high, slightly bent back towards 
the northeast so as to furnish cover from fire from the east bank of the 
creek, north of the trestle. The shelter tents could be pitched as "lean- 
to's" against the western slope of the fill, and hidden by bushes and 
branches of trees. 

(Note: The details of commanding this outguard, its action in case of 
attack, what should be done with a passing countryman, etc., can be prof- 
itably worked out in great detail.) 

Problem No. 2. 

Lieutenant ( to six squads) : We will take the same situation as we had 
in Problem 1, with squad outguards as before. 

Sergeant Adams, you have command of the platoon and have sent out 



132 CHAPTER V. 

the two outguards. Explain your arrangements for the support. (Par. 
116, p. 119.) 

Sergeant Adams: I have the men fall out by squads and rest on the 
side of the road while I look the ground over. I then tell Sergeant 
Barnes, "You will have immediate charge of the guard, cooking, visiting 
patrols, etc., here at the support. Detail three men from Corporal Evans's 
squad as first, second and third relief for the sentinel over the support. 
Post your sentinel at fhe road fork and give him the necessary instruc- 
tions as to the outguards, the adjacent support which is on this road 
(pointing west) on top of that ridge, etc. I will give you further instruc- 
tions later." I then fall in the remainder of the support (one sergeant, 
one cook, four corporals and twenty-seven privates, three squads being in- 
tact and one man- on duty as sentinel) and have shelter tents pitched un- 
der cover of the orchard and Mason house. While this is being com- 
pleted I select a line for a trench, about thirty-five yards long, behind the 
fence on the east and west road and extending east of the Chester Pike 
about fifteen yards, slightly bent back towards the northeast. No trench 
in the road. I then say to Sergeant Foss, "Take Graves's squad and con- 
struct a shelter trench along this line (indicating), having the parapet 
concealed. Cut the fences so as to furnish easy access." (Par. 116, p. 119.) 

I then say to Corporal Evans, "Take three men from your squad and, 
as a reconnoitering patrol, cross the trestle there (pointing), and follow 
that road (pointing to the Boling-Salem road) into Salem, reconnoiter- 
ing that village. Then take up a position on that ridge (pointing to 
Sandy Ridge) and remain out until dusk. Send me a message from 
Sandy Ridge with a sketch and description of the country." (Par. 117-a, 
p. 120.) 

I assume that Corporal Evans is familiar with the information about the 
enemy, the location of our outguards, etc. 

Selecting five men from Corporal Geary's squad and the remaining man 
of Corporal Evans' squad (three having been detailed for sentinel duty, 
and three sent -out on patrol duty with Corporal Evans), I turn them over 
to Sergeant Barnes, saying, "Here are six men to furnish three reliefs 
for a visiting patrol of two men. Have this patrol visit Outguard No. 2 
and cross the trestle, going south down the east bank of the creek; thence 
recross the creek at the road bridge visiting Outguard No. 1 ; thence 
across to the adjacent outguard of the support on our left, which is some- 
where on that ridge (pointing to the Twin Hills-Lone Hill Ridge) ; and 
thence to the starting point. Have them locate that support on their first 



THE SERVICE OF SECURITY. 133 

trip. You can reverse the route and make such minor changes from time 
to time as you think best. Report to me after they have completed the 
first round. Make arrangements for sending supper to the outguards. 
Take two men from Corporal Jackson's squad to carry it out. Be care- 
ful that the cook fire is not visible. I am going out to visit the Outguard 
No. 1 and then No. 2. You will have charge until I return." (Pars. 
117-c and 118, p. 121.) 

The men have stacked arms in front of the tents and have removed all 
equipment but their belts. (Par. 116-b, p. 119.) 

I would now visit the outguards, taking a man with me, and see if they 
are properly located. I would instruct the outguard commanders as to 
what to do in case of attack, in case strangers approach, point out their 
line of retreat in case of necessity, etc. I would make a sketch of the 
position and send it, with a description of my dispositions, to the com- 
mander of the outpost. 

Lieutenant: Your arrangements and dispositions appear satisfactory. 
You should have been more prompt in sending Corporal Evans out with 
his patrol. Why didn't you send a patrol towards York, or south along 
the Chester Pike? 

Sergeant Adams'- I considered that the support on my right would cover 
that ridge (Twin Hills-Lone Hill), and that the route I laid out for Cor- 
poral Evans would cover the Chester Pike and the country east of Sandy 
Creek at the same time, thus avoiding the necessity for two patrols. 

Lieutenant: That seems reasonable but you should have given some 
specific orders about reporting on the width, depth, etc., of Sandy Creek, 
which might prove a very valuable or dangerous obstacle. You can read- 
ily see how quickly a command becomes broken up and depleted in 
strength, and how important it is to make only such detachments as are 
necessary. It looks as if your outguards might have been made smaller 
considering the size of your platoon (6 squads), but I think the squad out- 
post is so much better than one not composed of a complete unit, that it 
is correct in this case. (Par. 119, p. 122.) With Corporal Evans' patrol 
of three men, the visiting patrol requiring six men, the sentinel post re- 
quiring three men, Sergeant Barnes, and the two outguards, you have 
thirty men actually on duty or detailed for duty, out of fifty-one. Of 
course, the men constituting the outguards, the man detailed for the vis- 
iting patrol and support sentinel, have approximately two hours on duty 
and four hours off duty, so they get some rest. Furthermore, you should 
have a three-man patrol watching the crossroads at Salem during the 



134 CHAPTER V. 

night, Corporal Evans' patrol having returned. This patrol should be 
relieved once during the night, at a previously stated hour, which means 
six more men who do not get a complete night's rest. (Par. 118, p. 121.) 

Sergeant Adams: Isn't Salem rather far to the front to send a patrol 
at night? 

Lieutenant: Yes, it is, but unless you touch the crossroads there you 
would have to have two patrols out, one near Maxey's farm and one on 
the Chester Pike. As it is you are leaving the road from York to the 
crossroads in front of Outguard No. 1, uncovered, but you should find 
that this is covered by a patrol from the adjacent support. The cross- 
roads in front of Outguard No. 1 is the natural place for a stationary, 
night patrol, but it is so close to the outguard that the benefit derived 
from a patrol there would be too small to justify the effort. 

(Note: Further details of the duties of this support can be gone into. 
The messages should be written, patrols carried through their tour of 
duty with the resulting situations to be dealt with ; the sentinels tested as 
to their knowledge of their duties, etc. Also note carefully the manner 
in which the support commander uses his noncommissioned officers for 
carrying out his intentions, and thus avoids the most objectionable and 
inefficient practice of dealing directly with the privates.) 

Problem No. 3 (Infantry). 

(See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book.) 

Situation. 

A Blue force, Companies A and B, 1st Infantry, under Captain A, in 
hostile country, is covering the Rock Island Bridge and camped for the 
night, April 20-21, on the south slope of Devin ridge (mi').. The enemy 
is moving northward from Kansas City (30 miles south of Leavenworth). 
At 3:30 P. M. Captain A receives a message from Colonel X at Beverly 
(2 miles east of Rock Island Bridge (qo'), stating that two or three com- 
panies of hostile infantry are reported five miles south of Leavenworth at 
2:30 P. M. No enemy is west of Leavenworth. Captain A decides to 
place one platoon on outpost. 

Required, I. Captain A's order. 

Answer. Verbally : "Two or three Red companies were 5 miles south of 
Leavenworth at 2 :30 P. M. today. No enemy is west of Leavenworth. 
We will camp here. 1st Platoon, "A" company, under Sergeant A, will 
form the outpost, relieving the advance guard (2d platoon Co. A). The 
line Pope Hill (sm')— Rabbit Point (tn') will be held. Detached posts 



THH SERVICE OF SECURITY. 135 

will be placed on Hill 880, west of Merritt Hill (W), and on Engineer 
Hill (<?/')• In case of attack the outpost line will be held. 

"The baggage will be at the main camp. 

"Messages will reach me on Devin Ridge (rm')." 

Issued verbally to officers and Sergeant A. 

Required, 2. Give verbatim (word for word) the order issued by Ser- 
geant A. 

Answer. "Two companies of the enemy were 5 miles south of Leaven- 
worth at 2 :30 P. M. today. Our camp is to be here. This platoon will 
be the outpost on the line Rabbit Point (**»') — Pope Hill (sm'). 

"The right support, 1st section, less 1 squad, under Sergeant B, will 
take position north of Pope Hill and cover the following front : the ra- 
vine (XIX — Merritt Hill) west of Grant avenue to the ravine about mid- 
way between Grant Avenue and Rabbit Point (tn'). 

"The left support, 2d section less 1 squad under Sergeant H, will take 
position on north slope of Rabbit Point and will cover the following front : 
the ravine midway between Grant Avenue and Rabbit Point to Missouri 
River. 

"Corporal D you will take the 8 men of your squad and form a de- 
tached post on Engineer Hill (qk'). 

"Corporal E, take your squad and form a detached post on Hill 880 
west of Merritt Hill (W). 

"If attacked hold your front. Each support and detached post will en- 
trench. 

"Send messages to me at right support." 

The outpost moves out, each support and detached post separately, 
without throwing out covering patrols, because the advance guard is now 
holding the front. There is no reserve. 

Required, 3. What does Sergeant A do now ? 

Required, 4. What does Sergeant B do as soon as he reaches Pope Hill ? 

(Note: During the remainder of the afternoon one man up in a tree on 
Grant Avenue will be the only observing post necessary for this support. 
At night an outguard would be placed on Grant Avenue with continuous 
patrols along the front, because the open ground furnishes easy approach 
to the enemy. A post of 4 men might also be placed on the bridge over 
Corral Creek (um'). • 

Required, 5. The location of supports and the main body of detached 
post on Engineer Hill. 

Required, 6. What patrolling would be done from the left support? 



136 CHAPTER VI. 

CHAPTEE VI. 

THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 

INTRODUCTION. 

135. The conducting of instruction in patrolling, outposts, combat, etc., 
by means of map problems has been fully explained. More valuable in- 
struction can be given by taking the student out and solving the problems 
with the actual ground before him, instead of a map of some locality he 
has never seen. This is a better mode of instruction than map problems, 
but, unfortunately, it takes more time. Suitable ground is not always 
conveniently located and weather conditions often make outdoor work 
impossible. During the winter, tactical walks are generally an impossibil- 
ity. Furthermore, map problems cannot successfully develop the military 
student in forming quick decisions and issuing orders ; and neither map 
problems nor tactical walks familiarize him with the difficulty of hav- 
ing his orders properly carried out, working in ignorance of the actions 
of subordinates at some distant point, and matching wits with a real op- 
ponent. This experience is furnished by maneuvers with real troops ; 
but maneuvers occur at t rare intervals, and even then the action is so 
rapid that there is too little time to ponder over mistakes and have the 
tactical principles involved properly explained. To meet this need, the 
War Game or Map Maneuvers have been developed. The designation 
Map Maneuvers is a better descriptive title and will be used hereafter. 

(Note: The method of conducting Map Maneuvers as described here- 
after is most elementary, being adapted for use in instructing noncommis- 
sioned officers and privates in their duties in campaign.) 

136. Outline of Procedure in Map Maneuvers. A director, usually 
the instructor, calls a certain number of the students to the map, which is 
spread out on a table. He gives them, either verbally or in writing, an 
imaginary situation (similar to those given in the map problems in this 
manual), which requires a commander to accomplish some mission. One 
of the students or players is detailed to represent the commander of the 
imaginary patrol, platoon, etc., and the other players assigned to various 
subordinate positions under him. 

After a careful consideration of the military problem that the situation 
presents to him, in connection with a study of the ground involved, as 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 137 

shown on the map, the commander states to the director his estimate of 
the situation, and his decision as to the manner in which he will meet the 
situation. He then gives his first orders, either verbally or in writing, 
to carry out his decision. If these orders require some independent ac- 
tion on the part of a subordinate, the director then has the subordinate 
commander issue his orders or describe his movements. The students 
then usually retire from the table to another room or out of hearing and, 
with a similar map, consider what may possibly happen and how to act 
under such circumstances. 

The director now calls a second lot of students to the map and gives 
them a situation, somewhat similar to the first one, but covering only what 
the enemy would know or would contemplate doing. The same procedure 
as before is followed in this case. 

The director now knows the intentions of the commanders of the two 
opposing forces and has their preliminary orders. From the map he can 
determine about where and when the leading elements will first meet, etc. 
He calls one side back to the map and starts them on the movements re- 
quired to carry out the orders that have been given, illustrating the dis- 
positions of the troops on the map with small pieces of cardboard (cut to 
a certain scale representing the size and formation of the troops, and 
fastened down by pins having blue or red heads, according to which force 
they represent). He describes the weather conditions, state of the roads, 
appearance of the country, crops in the fields, etc., telling them what can 
be seen or heard from time to time. Whenever a commander or sub- 
ordinate desires to make some change in his formation, send out a pa- 
trol, move in a new direction, halt, send a message, etc., he interrupts 
the director's description of the progress of the movement and gives his 
orders. 

The director thus carries along one side for a time, retires them from 
the map, and repeats this method with the opponents. Knowing the vari- 
ous rates at which infantry, cavalry or artillery can walk or ride, he can de- 
termine from the scale of the map, how rapidly the movements progress, 
where the different forces are on the map, and what the time of day 
would be, etc. When a patrol would have sighted the enemy, he describes 
to the patrol leader what he would see, indicating the enemy's apparent 
strength, and his position, by the pins and cardboard troop signs. He 
pictures the situation as graphically as possible, and has the patrol leader 
tell what he would then do. The latter may desire to move to some other 
point, to send a message, or to fire in order to protect himself, etc. 
Knowing the enemy's intended movements at this time, the director can 



138 CHAPTER VI. 

usually tell the patrol leader or other commander, what next happens. If 
the patrol leader's dispositions or movements, and the ground as indicated 
by the map, lead the director to believe the enemy would see the patrol, 
he probably has the patrol leader retire from the map and calls in the op- 
ponents, who are supposed to be with the element that has located the 
patrol. They are told what they see. They then describe what they would 
do, and in this manner the maneuver is conducted. 

When the director thinks the problem has been carried as far as prac- 
ticable, he assembles all the students at the map, tells them both situations, 
describes the orders given, dispositions made and movements throughout 
the maneuver. He then discusses the tactical principles involved in the 
execution of the maneuvers, and points out the mistakes made, the good 
judgment shown, and possibly gives his views as to the best methods that 
might have been followed in meeting the different situations. A general 
discussion is then usually invited and the work considered finished for 
that particular meeting. 

(Note: The following description of the materials necessary for map 
maneuvers is of importance principally to the officer who is to conduct the 
maneuver. Much of it is of no importance to the noncommissioned offi- 
cers and privates who are to take part in the maneuvers.) 

Equipment Required. 

137. Maps. A good map' is the most important necessity for map 
maneuvers. It should be on a large scale, so that small details on the 
ground will be plainly shown, such as fences, ditches, walls, etc. Prac- 
tically all maps for this purpose are made on a scale of 12 inches = 1 
mile. This means that one inch on the map represents about 150 yards 
on the ground. 

The Elementary Map accompanying this book is also made on a 
scale of 12 inches to* the mile, for use both as a wall map and for map 
maneuvers. 1 It is much better adapted for instructing noncommissioned 
officers than the more elaborate maps, as it has been carefully prepared 
with a view to being easily understood by men not well instructed in 
map reading. 

138. Table. The map should be spread out flat on a table. The top 
of the table should be of soft wood, if practicable, so that the pins stuck 
in the map will penetrate the wood easily and hold. If such a table is not 
available, sheets of blotting paper can be placed between the map and 



C 1 ) Can be obtained from the U. S. Infantry Association, Washington, D. C. ; 
Cost, $1.50, postpaid. 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 139 

table, or three dressed, soft pine planks, a foot and a half wide and six 
to seven feet long, may be cleated together. This will make a very satis- 
factory surface for the map. It can be placed on top of a smaller table 
or rested on two trestle supports, two feet four inches high. If the map is 
fastened to this detachable top, it can also be stood up vertically, instead 
of being hung on the wall, and the cardboard signs can be pinned on to 
assist in conducting map problems and one-sided map maneuvers (ex- 
plained later). 

139. Troop Signs. The troops are represented by small pieces of 
cardboard and strings of beads on copper wire.' The two forces are dis- 
tinguished by the color of the heads of the pins used to fasten -the card- 
board pieces on the map (blue and red), or the color of the beads. The 
arm of the service is distinguished by the color of the cardboard, blue for 
infantry, red for artillery and yellow for cavalry. Troops in column, 
halted or marching, are indicated by the carboard signs ; troops in skir- 
mish line, by the beads strung on copper wire, which can be bent to repre- 
sent any irregular skirmish line. All these troop signs are constructed so 
that they accurately show on a map, at a scale of 12 inches = 1 mile, the 
amount of ground the number of men they are to represent, would cover 
in column or deployed. 

The following figure shows the shape and sizes of the simpler pieces : 



O 



Troop of Cavalry Company of Infantry Squad- Infantry or Cavalry 
Column of Squada Column of Squads 

□ ' ® 

Platoon -Infantry or Cavalry Machine Gun 

140. Scales. In order that the director can readily determine what 
distance on the map individuals or troops would cover in a certain num- 
ber of minutes, he must have at hand scales of minutes of progress for 
dismounted troops moving in quick and double time, and for mounted 
troops at a walk, alternate walk and trot, trot and gallop, etc. A scale 
of yards is also necessary. All these scales can be conveniently arranged 
along the edges of a rectangular piece of cardboard, using the center 
space on each side of the card for printing certain data for convenient 
reference by the director. The two sides of such a card are shown in 
Figures II and III (on sheet in pocket at back of book). 



140 CHAPTER VI. 

141. A set of troop signs and scales (called a Map Maneuver Set) with 
cardboard pieces, beads, etc., to represent forces as. large as a brigade with 
sanitary troops, etc., can be obtained from the Secretary of the Service 
Schools at Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, for about 85 cents. However, for 
the small map maneuvers suitable for noncommissioned officers and pri- 
vates, such pieces and scales as are necessary can be readily improvised, 
and this course is recommended. The scales can easily be cut and marked, 
using the one shown in Figure 1 (on sheet in pocket at back of book) as 
an exact model. The pieces of cardboard to represent a squad, a platoon 
and a company or troop (from one to three men are usually represented 
by a single pin), can be cut from blue or yellow cardboard, similar to those 
shown in Figure I. Small blue or red beads can be strung on pieces of 
copper wire, and the colored headed pins bought at any dry goods store. 
Furthermore, the sets prepared at Fort Leavenworth represent units at 
war strength, while the companies, etc., we are accustomed to maneuver 
with are much smaller. This being the case, you can prepare your troop 
signs to represent the actual strength of your organization. 

For example, if you have 60 men in your company, they would occupy 
a distance of about 25 yards, in column of squads ; 25 yards on a scale of 
12 inches = 1 mile, is about one-sixth of an inch. Therefore, .cut your 
troop sign for a company of infantry in column of squads one-sixth of an 
inch long. 

A company of 60 men deployed as skirmishers at one man per two yards 
would be 120 yards long; 120 yards on a scale of 12 inches = 1 mile is 
about .8 of an inch. Therefore, make your string of blue or red beads .8 
of an inch long. For map maneuvers involving the work of patrols, ad- 
vance and rear parties, outguards, etc., strings of beads are hardly neces- 
sary, as the elements concerned are too small to be represented to scale. 

142. Miscellaneous. The director should provide pads of paper, pen- 
cils, etc., for writing orders and making notes. Message blanks should be 
available, and the Drill Regulations and Field Service Regulations at hand. 

143. Rooms. The most satisfactory arrangement is for the director to 
have the table and map in one, well lighted room, with two adjoining 
rooms for the opponents or players. In the director's room there should 
be chairs arranged for those present who are not taking an active part in 
the maneuver, and each adjoining room should be supplied with com- 
fortable chairs, writing material, etc., in order that the active participants 
may have a comfortable place to sit, write, smoke, etc., while discussing 
the movements and waiting to be called to the map. 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 141 

Each set of players should be supplied with a map similar to the di- 
rector's map, but on a smaller scale. The Elementary Map in back of this 
book is well adapted for this purpose. 

It is important that Map Maneuvers should be played under as com- 
fortable conditions as possible. Where but one large room is available 
the map can be placed in the center and the players assigned to opposite 
ends of the room. In this case it is desirable to place a screen between 
the players' and the director's map. 

The Director. 

144. Qualifications. The success of map maneuvers depends largely 
upon the efficiency of the director. He should have a thorough knowledge 
of the application of the tactical principles the maneuvers involve; he 
should be able to read a map at sight ; he should be a man of quick de- 
cision, have an accurate memory and have the gift of rendering deci- 
sions and imparting instructions without giving offense. No matter how 
thorough a knowledge an officer may have of tactics, map reading and 
the methods of conducting a map maneuver, he will be a failure as a di- 
rector unless he has a certain amount of tact and, above all, is able to 
carry the maneuver along rapidly, without slighting the important points. 
A tedious map maneuver does more harm than good. Where possible, 
company officers should direct the map maneuvers for their men. 

145. Preparation of Problem. The director should prepare the prob- 
lem in advance of the meeting, having in view the illustration of some 
tactical principle. The problem- consists of two situations, one for the Red 
side and one for the Blue. These situations should be simple and short, 
free from nonessential elaborations. The commanders of opposing sides 
should be given their situations at least a day in advance of the meeting, 
except in the case of very simple maneuvers, when the situation may be 
stated verbally at the map. 

The situations should be similar to those given in the "dialogue" map 
problems in this text, where, of course, but one situation (instead of two) 
is presented, the opposing forces being developed by the instructor. 

146. Decisions. The director must constantly make decisions on a 
variety of subjects. He announces the state of the weather and the roads ; 
describes the appearance of the country, and whether streams are ford- 
able or not ; determines the rates of progress ; decides what can be seen ; 
plays the part of such citizens as may be encountered ; describes the ef- 
fect of fire, deciding whether troops can advance, stand fast or must fall 



142 CHAPTER VI. 

back; announces the condition of troops as to fatigue, demoralization, 
etc., and thus supplies all the conditions that would be present in actual 
campaign. His decisions should be short, quickly given, and absolutely 
final. No argument should be permitted and players should be made to 
understand that the maneuver is for purposes of instruction, and in actual 
zvar results are just as unexpected as the decisions of the director may 
seem to be. 

The decisions of the director as to the effect of fire must be based on 
the amount of care shown in giving the orders for firing (character, range, 
target, etc.), the field of fire (open or close, gentle slope or steep slope), 
the condition of the troops delivering the fire as to morale, exhaustion, 
etc., the formation of the troops fired at, the duration of the fire, etc. De- 
tailed tables have been worked out to show the effect of fire under various 
conditions, but there is no place for them in an elementary exposition of 
map maneuvers, such as this, intended for the instruction of noncom- 
missioned officers and enlisted men. The director should remember that 
there are far less hits per shot on the battlefield than on the target range. 
The players in map maneuvers invariably believe that their fire would 
have caused double or treble the casualties that it actually would have in 
campaign. 

147. Calculations and Notes. The situations given the two sets of 
players should state some hour at which the maneuver starts. This does 
not mean the time of day at which the players actually meet and com- 
mence the maneuver, but the time at which the imaginary movements are 
supposed to begin on the ground. By means of the scale of minutes of 
progress at the different gaits, the director can carry the movements of 
the two forces along on the map at the same relative rates they would 
make on the ground. One detachment may be mounted and moving at a 
trot while another, advancing to meet the first one, may be on foot, mov- 
ing at the ordinary marching rate. Naturally, the mounted detachment 
will cover a much greater distance in a certain number of minutes than 
the foot troops. The director, using the scale of distances, given in min- 
ute lengths, for cavalry at a trot and the scale for infantry at a walk, can 
determine about the point at which the two detachments would meet and 
the number of minutes they would have traveled. 

For example, suppose a cavalry patrol starts from Boling for Salem at the 
same time (8 A. M.) that an infantry patrol starts from Salem for Boling, 
the first patrol alternating the walk and trot. (Elementary Map, 12 inches 
— 1 mile). Where would they meet and at what time? The director 
could estimate that the infantry patrol would cover only about two-thirds 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 143 

the distance the cavalry patrol would cover — that is, somewhere near the 
cut where the road crosses the 42 hill between the County Road and the 
Gibbs house. Measuring from Boling with the scale of one minute di- 
visions for cavalry at a walk and trot, he finds it takes the patrol 35 min- 
utes to go from Boling to a point half way up the 42 hill. Now, measur- 
ing north from Salem with the scale of one minute intervals for infantry 
at its ordinary marching rate on the road, 80 yards per minute, he finds the 
infantry patrol would be about 375 yards north of the County Road in 35 
minutes. The two patrols would thus be about 450 yards apart at the end 
of 35 minutes. The director could now make a close enough estimate for 
the purpose of any map maneuver — but to locate the exact point of meet- 
ing, scale off two more miles of advance for each patrol. This does not 
quite bring them to the meeting point, but shows that they will meet in less 
than a minute, about 515 yards north of the County Road at 8 :37^2 A. M. 
This, of course, presumes that nothing interferes with the march of either 
patrol. 

Suppose the question had been, where will these two patrols be when 
they first sight each other and what time will it be? The director can 
at once see that, unless the cavalry patrol sends a man off the road to 
Bald Knob, there is no chance of their sighting each other until the min- 
ute the first cavalryman reaches the middle of the cut in the road across 
the 42 hill, or about 8 :36 A. M., when the infantry patrol would be about 
450 yards north of the County Road (36 minutes of travel from Salem). 
It can be seen from this example that the director must have the leader 
of the cavalry patrol explain his dispositions as he goes along the road 
from Boling. Otherwise he would not know whether or not a man was 
sent up on Bald Knob. It would not be correct to ask the leader of the 
cavalry patrol, "Are you going to send a man up on Bald Knob?" for this 
would suggest that action to the leader. The director must describe the 
road as the patrol passes along, describing things the map does not show, 
the progress of the patrol from point to point, etc., allowing the leader to 
interrupt at any moment and explain any changes he makes in his dis- 
positions. If the director carries the patrol beyond Bald Knob and the 
leader or his men say nothing about it, the director gives them no idea 
that he considers this important, but continues along as before, keeping 
careful track of the arrangement of the men as they ascend Hill 42, where 
they will first sight the enemy, or be sighted themselves. 

Suppose, for example, as the cavalry patrol passed the lane into the 
Gray farm the leader said to Smith, "Gallop up that lane to the farm build- 



144 CHAPTER VI. 

ings and across to that hill (Bald Knob), taking a look over the country. 
Rejoin us on this road." Now, at what time would the infantry patrol be 
sighted and where would it be? It is 15 minutes' walk and trot from Boling 
to the farm, lane, and about 5 minutes' gallop (not mounted messenger 
scale) up the - farm lane, by the buildings, and to the top of Bald Knob — 
20 minutes in all from Boling. Add, say, 3 minutes for questioning people 
and opening gates at the Gray farm, and the flanker would reach the top 
of Bald Knob at 8.23 o'clock. Can he see the infantry patrol? At 8:23 
this patrol would be about 50 yards south of the wooden bridge over Deep 
Run, and it is apparent that the woods between this bridge and the County 
Road would hide the patrol from flanker Smith. So he would not see 
them from Bald Knob unless he remained there until they passed the 
woods and reached the crossroads, which would be 6 minutes later. But 
even here the patrol would be hidden from his view by the 42 hill, which 
is just high enough, and squarely between Smith and the crossroads. 

(Note: In making these calculations the patrols have been considered 
as individuals for simplicity of demonstration. The infantry patrol, for 
instance, would probably be stretched along the road for at least 150 
yards, and the cavalry patrol for a much greater distance.) 

After calculating about where and when the hostile forces will first come 
in contact (this means when one or both sight the enemy) the director 
can call the players to the map, one side at a time, and, explaining what 
they see along the route followed, carry the maneuver along, giving the 
commanders and their subordinates an opportunity to describe the ar- 
rangement of their detachments from time to time and give any orders 
they desire, as woods, hills, bridges, farms, etc., are passed. After he has 
worked each side up to within a short distance of the point of expected 
(by the director) contact, his knowledge of their dispositions will enable 
him to decide who will first see the enemy, etc. 

On a scratch pad he should make such brief notations of time and place, 
concerning the progress of the maneuver, as may be necessary to jog his 
memory. Each director should keep his notes in the manner most con- 
venient for him. There is no regulation method, but an example is given, 
in the map maneuver worked out in detail, further on in this text. 

Instruction of Beginners. 

148. Exercises in Using Troop Signs, Learning Rates of March, 
etc. In order that the beginner may become familiar with the troop signs, 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 145 

acquire an idea of the rates of march, etc., a few exercises should be given 
before entering into a regular maneuver. 

(a) Place two companies of Blue infantry in column of squads on the 
map, tail of the column at the northeastern corner of the cemetery, 800 
yards northeast of York, column traveling towards the Chester Pike. 
Place a platoon 500 yards in advance, as advance guard, with a point of a 
squad 300 yards further to the front. Indicate a patrol of three men as 
flankers on top of the ridge in the woods by the Mills farm. 

Required. Have the student pick out the proper pins and troop signs 
and place them on the map. Have him determine the distance in yards 
from the patrol to the advance guard and compare this with a similar dis- 
tance he is familiar with on the ground. 

(b) Place a skirmish line of Reds, about 100 yards long, along the 
southern edge of the orchard by the Brown house. Indicate a troop of 
Blue cavalry on the Chester Pike, 1,200 yards south of the orchard in 
column of fours, with a patrol of eight men 500 yards in advance (to- 
wards the enemy). 

Required. Similar to (a). Also have the student determine whether 
the Reds can see any of the Blues and whether an effective fire could be 
delivered, etc. 

(c) A company of Blue infantry marched west from Oxford at 8 o'clock 
— destination, Boling. At 8 :30 a mounted orderly was told to gallop rap- 
idly after the company and deliver a message. Where would he catch up 
with the company and at what time, assuming no halts were made? 

Solution. Measure, say, forty minutes of infantry marching at 80 yards 
per minute. This gives the location of the infantry company at 8 :40. Now, 
measure minutes of travel for the mounted messenger. Eight minutes puts 
him beyond the company, so try the position of the messenger after 7 
minutes' travel (8:37) and the company after 37 minutes' travel (8:37). 
The messenger is still slightly beyond the infantry and it can be seen that 
he would catch up at about 8 :36^4, at a point 775 yards west of the cross- 
roads by the Baker house. Of course, in a map maneuver you would not 
figure this out to the fraction of a minute, because it would make the 
game too tedious, and the many possibilities for delays, etc., in actual cam- 
paign would more than equal minor errors in such calculations. But it is 
desirable at first to make all calculations as close as possible in order to 
train the eye and mind in making close estimates. Later you may esti- 
mate in many cases, not using the scale. 

(d) A Red infantry patrol leaves Salem at 9 A. M., with orders to 
proceed along the Chester Pike to the crossroads at the Smith house and 



146 CHAPTER VI. 

return to Salem. It marches steadily to the crossroads, halts there for 10 
minutes and then returns to Salem. At what time did the patrol reach 
Salem and how far had it traveled? 

Solution. At 80 yards per minute it takes 42 minutes to reach the cross 
roa ds — 42 -4- 10 + 42 = 94 minutes. The patrol returns to Salem at 10:34 
A. M. It had traveled about 3^ miles. 

(e) The support of a Blue infantry outpost is at the stone bridge 200 
yards east of the crossroads by the Smith house on the Chester Pike. A 
visiting patrol of three men is ordered to follow the bank of Sandy Creek 
to the railroad trestle, where an outguard is stationed. How long will it 
take the patrol to reach the outguard? 

Solution. At a rate of 80 yards per minute' it will take 28 minutes. As 
the patrol is not following a road or path, and will be delayed by trees, 
bushes, etc., from 3 to 10 minutes should be added to the 28, depending 
upon the character of the ground as stated by the director. 

149. One-Sided Map Maneuver. A further method of instructing be- 
ginners in the methods followed in map maneuver*, is by means of the 
one-sided maneuver. The students or players are all on one side and the 
director, in addition to his regular duties, represents the enemy. Using 
the map spread out on the table or placed against the wall, and utilizing 
the troop signs wherever possible, the one-sided maneuver is conducted in 
almost exactly the same manner as the dialogue map problems given in 
this book. 

The one-sided maneuver has the following advantages in instructing be- 
ginners : 

Having only one side to consult as to orders, dispositions, etc., the di- 
rector can work more rapidly, give more attention to the details of the stu- 
dents' movements, and carry the maneuver through more instructive situ- 
ations. 

Having control of the enemy's movements, the director can demonstrate 
the faults of any dispositions by causing the enemy to take advantage of 
them. He can be more certain of bringing about instructive situations 
than when he has no control over the orders and dispositions of 
both sides. There is no certainty as to what course the regular two-sided 
map maneuver will take, as the two leaders are free to give such orders 
as they think best. 

In a one-sided maneuver the players remain constantly at the map, and 
thus receive more instruction. 

It should not be considered from the foregoing that the one-sided ma- 






THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 147 

neuver is better for purposes of instruction than the regular map maneuver. 
It is better for beginners, but interest cannot be maintained indefinitely, 
principally because the players feel that the director can take too many 
liberties with the enemy's movements. Furthermore, the student feels that 
there is no contest of wits between himself and the enemy, as the director, 
playing the enemy's part, also has full knowledge of the plans and move- 
ments of the other side. 

150. Situations for One-Sided Map Maneuvers. The situations given 
in the various dialogue map maneuvers furnish excellent examples of situ- 
ations for these map maneuvers. They should be short and simple, dealing 
with patrols and forces not larger than a platoon. The director should 
plan each situation with a view to illustrating certain tactical principles, 
and the leading of the patrols or squads under certain circumstances. 

Examples : (a) A Blue company from the north camps at Boling at 2 
P. M. Sergeant Davis is given the following orders : "Red scouts have 
been seen in the valley of Sandy Creek. The company (or troop) will 
remain here for the night. Take three men and patrol south along Sandy 
Creek for two miles and see if any large detachments of the enemy are 
in this vicinity." 

The director could have in view the following points for Sergeant Davis 
and his patrol : The proper inspection and formation of the patrol ; the 
route to be followed ; the information given the outpost of the company ; 
the reconnoitering of Boling woods ; the reconnoitering of the Baker farm 
and questioning of its occupants ; the action of Sergeant Davis when a 
mounted Red scout or patrol is sighted (no word should be sent back as 
the company commander already knows Red scouts are in the vicinity) ; 
Sergeant Davis' action when he has gotten about two miles out and it 
appears that by going a half mile further he may secure important in- 
formation (he should go on) ; the route taken in returning (different 
from the outward route); the sending of a properly written message; 
Sergeant Davis' idea of the country as shown by the map ; his report on 
returning, etc. 

(b) A Blue battalion of infantry on the Valley Pike at the crossroads 
by the Baker house, is hurrying south to seize York. The Reds are re- 
ported to be moving from the east towards York. Company A, Blue Bat- 
talion, forms the advance guard, with Sergeant Davis 400 yards in ad- 
vance commanding the point of one squad. 

The director could have in view the following points for Sergeant Davis 
and his point: The formation of the point; the non-use of flankers in 



148 CHAPTER VI. 

open country where it can be observed from the road ; the use of flankers 
in crossing the hills on the Valley Pike ; the action of Sergeant Davis when 
the point is fired on from the cut in the road one mile and a third north 
of York (he should act quickly to prevent the march of the column from 
being delayed in case the Reds were only a delaying patrol), etc. 

(c) A Red infantry platoon is stationed at the Brown farm, on the 
Chester Pike, as support of an outpost. Corporal Barnes is given the fol- 
lowing orders : "Take your squad and move north on this road to the first 
road forks (by the Morey house), and establish yourself there as Out- 
guard No. 2 of this support. Outguard No. 1 is about one-half mile out 
this lane (pointing along the lane along the southern edge of Boling 
Woods). The enemy is reported to be camped five miles north of here. 
Move out at once." 

The director could have in view the following points for Corpor.al 
Barnes and his squad : The formation of the squad as it marches out to 
its position ; the necessity of sending flankers through the western edge 
of Boling Woods, despite the heavy underbrush ; the sending of a tem- 
porary scout to look over the country from Long Ridge ; the arrangements 
made at the road foks ; the position of the sentinel, his instructions, and 
the position of the remainder of the squad ; Corporal Barnes' action in 
case a Blue patrol is sighted (should immediately send back a message, 
as no Blues were thought to be that close) ; Corporal Barnes' action in 
case his outguard is attacked from the cut on hill 38, etc. 

Conduct of a Two-Sided Map Maneuver. 

151. After the students have become familiar with the map, scales, troop 
signs and one-sided maneuvers, the director can take up the regulation 
map maneuver, with two opposing sides. There should not be more play- 
ers on a side than the director can bring into active participation in the 
game, usually not more than four or five and preferably but two or three. 
The students who are not assigned as players in a maneuver can secure 
most valuable instruction by sitting around the director's map table and 
following the play of both sides. Frequently more will be learned in this 
manner than when actually participating in the maneuver. Observers 
should be permitted to smoke, should be shown both situations, and, when 
no players are present, they should be allowed to discuss the progress of 
the maneuver with each other. The director (who is really the instructor 
in map maneuvers for noncommissioned officers and privates) should 
make every effort to make the surroundings of a map maneuver as pleas- 
ant as possible. 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 149 

152. The following" is an example of the method usually fol- 
lowed in conducting' a map maneuver, worked out in detail. The 
students should follow out this maneuver on the map, the director 
reading* the text aloud, placing" the pins, etc. 

Director: Captain A. 

Blue players: Sergeant Adams, Corporals Baker. Carter and Davis. 

Red players: Sergeant Ely, Corporals Fry, Gray and Hay. 

The following situation, in writing, is given to Sergeant Adams fifteen 
minutes before the maneuver is to commence : 

Blue Situation: A Blue reconnoitering platoon from Chester, halts at 
10 A. M., August 2d, in the clump of woods 300 yards north of Baker's 
pond, to rest and eat lunch during the heat of the day. The inhabitants 
are friendly to the Blues, and the platoon commander is lead to believe 
that there is a large hostile camp 8 miles to the south. At 10 :05 A. M., 
Sergeant Adams receives the following orders : "The platoon will remain 
here until 2 P. M., when it returns to Chester. Take three men from the 
first squad and reconnoiter south through the valley that the railroad fol- 
lows. It is very important that the enemy does not learn of the presence 
of the platoon in this neighborhood. I am sending Sergeant Mills with 
a patrol down that road (pointing to the Valley Pike). Return by 2 
P. M." The day is clear and warm. 

Required: 

1. Sergeant Adams' estimate of the situation. 

2. His orders. 

The following situation, in writing, is given Sergeant Ely fifteen min- 
utes before the maneuver is to commence : 

Red Situation'- A Red battalion of infantry is encamped on August 2d, 
one mile south of Salem, in hostile country. Sergeant Ely is given the 
following orders : "A spy reports that Blue troops moved south from Ches- 
ter early this morning. Select four men from Corporal Smith's squad and 
reconnoiter towards Chester and determine whether or not this informa- 
tion is correct. The battalion will remain here today unless the Blues 
appear south of Boling, in which case we will probably advance to drive 
the enemy back. Return by 3 P. M." At 10 A. M. Sergeant Ely's patrol 
reaches Salem. The weather is clear and warm. 

Required: 

1. Sergeant Ely's estimate of the situation. 

2. His orders at Salem. 

Sergeants Adams and Ely have received their situations and retired to 



150 CHAPTER VI. 

their respective rooms with their assistants to study the situation on the 
small scale map. The director has the large map spread out on his table ; 
he has his troop signs and scales on one corner of the table ; and explains 
both situations to the students who are not active participants, but are 
merely observers. At the end of fifteen minutes the director tells one of 
the observers, who has been detailed to act as messenger, to call the Blue 
side to the map. 

Director: Are you ready, Sergeant Adams? 

Sgt. Adams: Has the platoon any outposts? 

Director: Two men on Hill 83, two on Lone Hill and one where the 
platoon is resting. 

Sgt. Adams: I have four hours in which to patrol, but as my men have 
already marched about eight miles from Chester and are to return there 
tonight, I must be careful not to overtax them. Assuming that nothing 
occurs, I will work south until about 12:15 P. M. and then turn back. 
My mission is a double one. I am to scout the valley for information 
about the enemy, and I am also to prevent the enemy from learning of the 
presence of the platoon. As I could not see into the valley from my pres- 
ent position, I will move to Hill 62, from where I can overlook the valley 
and learn what the outposts there have seen. I will then determine on 
my route. In moving to Hill 62 I will send Baker 100 yards in advance 
and follow with the other two men. 

Director: (Makes note of time of starting 10:10). You should 
have given your orders to your patrol, explaining your mission, but 
to save time we will omit that. When you arrive on Hill 62 (places 
blue pin with small blue circle on Hill 62) the men there tell you they 
have seen no one in the valley. .You see the Chester Pike, which appears 
to be a good road bordered on either side by wire fences and a thick 
growth of weeds. You can follow the course of the railroad to the fill 
just beyond Sandy Creek, and the course of the latter can be traced by 
the trees and bushes along its banks. The fields between the creek and 
the Chester Pike are in uncut hay ; those east of the Creek seem to be 
mostly meadow land. To the south you can see a range of hills across 
the valley (Sandy Ridge and Hill 42 would so appear at this distance). 
You cannot see the Mason house or country beyond, as the spur in your 
immediate front hides this section from your view. 

Sgt. Adams: I intend to move along this ridge, keeping along the west- 
ern edge of the woods, to the spur 600 yards south of me, and then head 
for the Chester Pike at the Mason farm, and work across to gain the top 
of Sandy Ridge. I give the following orders: "We will move south to 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. . 151 

that hill (Sandy Ridge), keeping to the west of these woods. In case we 
become separated make for the railroad and, if there appears to be no 
chance of our reassembling, follow it back to the platoon. Baker will go 
about 150 yards in advance; Davis will follow me at 100 yards; and 
Carter will scout through the woods, all keeping in sight of me and watch- 
ing for signals." When I reach the ridge 600 yards south of Hill 62, what 
do I see? 

Director: (Moves pin to new position.) You get a better view of Sandy 
Ridge and can see the orchard and tops of buildings at the Mason farm. 
You can see the stone wall and line of trees running west from the Pike 
to the Mills farm, and the buildings there. Immediately below you is the 
crossroad running west from Mason's. The field between it and the Mills 
farm lane is dotted with stacks of cut corn stalks. 

Sgt. Adams: We will descend from the ridge and move across the fields 
towards the Mason orchard. 

Director: The Blues may retire. 

(The director now measures with the one minute of march scale for 80 
yards per minute, from the platoon to Hill 62 (10 mins.), adds 5 minutes 
for the delay there, and measures to the ridge where he discontinued with 
the Blues (9 mins.). He then jots these down in his notes and removes 
the troop signs and says, "Call the Reds to the map."). 

Director: Sergeant Ely, give your estimate of the situation. 

Sgt. Ely: My mission requires me to reconnoiter north towards Chester 
for signs of the enemy, and to send back any information of hostile de- 
tachments in this vicinity as quickly as possible in order that the battalion 
commander can arrange to drive them back. I am left free to determine 
my own route towards Chester, and on learning how the roads run from 
Salem, due north through Boling and one around Sandy Ridge and then 
north about ^ of a mile west of the first road, I consider that I should 
move so that I can watch both of these roads. I can best do. this by 
moving to the top of Sandy Ridge, from where I can secure a good view 
of the country; and from there follow the railroad and Sandy Creek. 
As I am in hostile country, I must be careful to keep my men together and, 
in general, to avoid being seen by the inhabitants. Of course, I have al- 
ready been seen in Salem. I assume that we have not done any march- 
ing this morning, and as I have five hours in which to work, I may be 
able to go 6 miles north of our camp and get back by 3 P. M. I have 
allowed for a number of halts and for cross country walking. I have ex- 



152 CHAPTER VI. 

plained my mission to the patrol and told them we would hrst head for 
Sandy Ridge, where we would assemble in case we became separated. 
When we turn northwest onto the Chester Pike in Salem, I am 75 yards 
in advance of Fry and Gray, Hay is 50 yards to the right of the Pike and 
the fourth man follows Fry and Gray at 25 yards. 

Director: Have Gray act as rear guard and the fourth (imaginary) man 
go with Fry. 

Sgt. Ely: Very well, sir. What does Sandy Ridge look like? 

Director: It is covered with short grass and frequent outcroppings of 
rock. 

Sgt. Ely: In order to mislead the people in Salem, I will continue along 
the Pike to just beyond where it crosses the southern nose of Sandy 
Ridge. I will then turn off the road and ascend the west slope of Sandy 
Ridge until I gain the crest, signaling to the other men to keep below the 
crest. What do I see? 

Director: (Placing a red pin near crest of Hill 68.) You can see the 
Barton farm and orchard, the Mills farm and lane, and the high ridge 
running north from Barton's. You can follow the Chester Pike as far 
as the Mills farm, and Sandy Creek as far as the swamp. Hay has been 
cut from the field north of Barton's and south of the County Road. You 
can see the latter road from the steel bridge to the crest of the ridge to 
the west; north of the County Road the fields are dotted with stacks of 
corn stalks. East of Sandy Ridge you can follow the road to Boling as 
far as Bald Knob. The Maxey house is plainly visible and the railroad 
can be traced as far as the Quarry switch. The fields on this side are 
mostly in grass. There is no sign of the enemy in any direction. What 
do you do? 

Sgt. Ely: I will follow along the west slope of the ridge, just below 
the crest, to its northern face, and look over the country from there. 

Director: The Reds may retire. 

(The director must now pause a few moments to determine if either 
patrol sights the other. He calculates that Sergeant Ely reaches the crest 
of Hill 68 on Sandy Ridge in 30 minutes from Salem, or at 10:30, and 
remains there five minutes, resting after the march and climb and study- 
ing the country. At 10 :25 the Blue patrol started down from the ridge 
for the Mason's orchard. It wouH, therefore, be off the ridge and in the 
low land by 10:30 and, therefore, invisible to the Reds. The northern 
part of Sandy Ridge would cut off Sergeant Ely's view from Hill 68, and 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 153 

the distance is also too great without the use of field glasses. The Blues 
would reach the cover of the orchard at 10 :35 or 2 minutes after the Red 
patrol starts along Sandy Ridge from Hill 68. It is about 8 minutes from 
Hill 68 to Hill 66, from where the Reds can have a full view of the valley 
to the north, and might also be seen from the Mason house, which is less 
than a mile away. Sergeant Ely will reach Hill 66 at 10:41, 6 minutes 
after the Blue patrol enters the orchard. The director notes down the 
time the Blues enter the orchard and the Reds reach Hill 66. He must now 
learn what Sergeant Adams does after reaching the orchard, and Sergeant 
Ely's formation, etc., on arriving at Hill 66, before he can decide what 
may happen. All these calculations should require but two or three min- 
utes, and as the director becomes more expert he can in many cases omit 
calculations and make a rapid estimate. The Red pin is removed and a 
Blue pin placed at point where Blues were left.) 

Director: Call the Blues to the map. (Blues enter.) Sergeant Adams, 
describe your formation and movements in going from here to the or- 
chard. 

Sgt. Adams: The patrol retains practically its original formation, 
slightly increasing the distances, except Carter, who closes to within 25 
yards of me. We move straight across to the orchard and I halt the pa- 
trol under its cover and go forward by myself to see if anyone is about 
the place. If there is any one I will question them. 

Director: (Moves Blue pin to Mason house.) Mason and his wife are 
at the house. 

Sgt. Adams: I ask them if they have seen or heard anything of the 
enemy. 

Director: They say that they have heard nothing except that Reds 
were reported two days ago to be marching north from a city 20 miles 
south of here. They appear honest. 

Sgt. Adams: How did they hear this? 

Director: From a man who came up from Salem on business. 

Sgt. Adams: What time is it now? 

Director: It is 10:40. 

Sgt. Adams'- Do I see anything suspicious to the south? 

Director: No. 

Sgt. Adams: I wave to my patrol to advance and walk out into the 
Chester Pike. I intend to follow the Pike to the crossroads and there 
cross the Creek on the County Road and gain the top of Sandy Ridge. 



154 CHAPTER VI. 

Barker is 100 yards in front, Carter near me and Davis 75 yards in rear. 
When I 

Director (Interrupting) : That will do for the present. The Blues may 
retire. (Removes the Blue pin and places a Red one on Hill 68.) Call 
the Reds to the map. (The Reds enter.) Sergeant Ely, you may con- 
tinue to describe your movements from here. 

Sgt. Bly: I advance just below the crest of the ridge with two men 
about 50 yards behind me, Gray about 50 yards behind them, and further 
down the hill, and Hay about 100 yards down the hill to my left. When 
I reach Hill 66 I signal to the men to lie down, and I lie down behind the 
crest and look over the country. 

Director: You see two or three dismounted men moving south along 
the Chester Pike from the road junction at the Mason house. They are 
scattered along the road for what appears to be 100 yards. (Places three 
blue-headed pins in road to represent this.) 

Sgt. Bly: Have they seen me? 

Director: You do not know. 

Sgt. Bly: I will watch them for a few minutes. 

Director: They continue along the road. 

Sgt. Bly: I crawl quickly back to Fry and call to the other men to 
move up the hill, keeping low, and cross over in rear of Hill 66 to the 
east slope of the Ridge. We all move over and go down the side of the 
hill about 100 yards. "Fry, hurry back to the battalion and tell Major X 
that a Blue infantry patrol is moving south down the Chester Pike." 
Captain, how far is the Blue patrol from our battalion and what time is it? 

Director: It is 10 :45, but you will have to estimate the distance. 

Sgt. Bly: Fry, hurry back to the battalion and tell Major X that a Blue 
patrol of three men was moving south on the Chester Pike, 3 miles from 
his camp at 10:45. Do you understand? 

Corporal Fry: Yes, sir. 

Director: What do you do now, Sergeant? Corporal Fry, step away 
from the map a moment. (Places a Red pin to mark Ely's next position.) 

Sgt. Bly: I lead my patrol down the hill to where the County Road 
crosses the railroad. From there I intend to move north along the rail- 
road. 

Director: All the Reds, except Corporal Fry, may retire. Corporal, 
step to the map and tell me what you do. 

Corp. Fry: I would run south down the slope of the Ridge to the rail- 
road and follow it back to the battalion, avoiding the town of Salem. 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 155 

Director: Well, what do you do then? Do not look at the map. 

Corp. Fry: I tell the Major, "Sergeant Ely sent me back to tell you 
that a Blue patrol of three men was moving south on the Chester Pike at 
10:45." 

Director: The Major asks you what Sergeant Davis is doing now. 

Corp. Fry: I do not know. I left him at Sandy Ridge. 

Director: You would probably have looked back and have seen him 
descending from the ridge. How long do you think it would have taken 
you to get back? 

Corp. Fry-' About 20 minutes. 

Director: It is about 1^4 miles, which would probably take you about 
25 minutes. You may now remain at the map as a spectator. 

(The director now removes the Red troop signs, places a Blue pin to 
represent the position of the Blue patrol 300 yards south of the Mason 
house, and calculates that the Red patrol would reach the railroad cross- 
ing at 10:55, and that for the Blue patrol it is now 10:45.) 

Director: Call the Blues to the map. (The Blues enter.) Corporal 
Baker, as you reach this point you see two dismounted men, Reds you 
think, disappear over the hill here (places a Red pin at the southern end 
of Hill 66). 

Corp. Baker: I halt and hold my rifle horizontally above my head. If 
Sergeant Adams is not looking, I call to him, and when he looks I point 
in the direction of Hill 66, and then lie down at the side of the road. 

Sgt. Adams-' Do I see them? 

Director: No. 

Sgt. Adams: I would have all the men take cover and would run for- 
ward, stooping, to Baker and find out what he had seen, and then watch 
the hill for a few moments. 

Director-' You see nothing. 

Sgt. Adams-' Is the hay in the fields east of the Pike high enough to 
furnish cover? 

Director: It is about 3 feet high. 

Sgt. Adams-' I suppose my patrol has been seen, for we are out in an 
open valley; there is not much hope of moving without being seen, there- 
fore, I continue rapidly down the Pike and turning east, cross the creek 
on the steel bridge. I order Baker to keep about 200 yards in advance, 
send Carter about 100 yards north of the County Road and have Davis 



156 CHAPTER VI. 

follow me at 100 yards. I have cautioned all to keep a sharp lookout and 
be prepared to jump for cover. I signal Baker to turn out of the road 
and make for Hill 66. 

Director: What are your intentions? 

\Sgt. Adams: I want to see beyond Sandy Ridge. If I merely stayed 
in the valley, prepared to keep the Red patrol, if it was a patrol, from 
going in the direction of the platoon, I might do that, but I would ac- 
complish nothing in regard to finding out about a larger force in this 
vicinity. By going directly to the hill, I may get to see beyond it and 
learn that much more; and if the Red patrol has tried to go north, avoid- 
ing me, I should be able to see them, I think, and go straight for them, 
cutting them off, capturing them or forcing them to turn east. I may be 
shot up myself in going up this hill, but I consider I must take the chance. 
I am in a bad position and have not much choice, if I intend to learn any- 
thing in the short time I am to stay out. What time is it, Captain? 

Director (Measuring from point 300 yards south of Mason's) : It is 
now 11:10. The Blues may retire. Call the Reds to the map. (He 
moves the Blue pins and places a Red pin at the railroad crossing on the 
County Road.) Sergeant Ely, describe your dispositions and movements 
from this point. 

Sgt. Ely-' We start down the railroad, Gray 75 yards in front, Hay the 
same distance to the west of the track, and the third man following me 
at 50 yards. I order Hay to keep a careful watch to the west for the 
other patrol. Can he see them? 

Director: No; the Ridge cuts off his view now. 

Sgt. Ely-' When we get beyond the northern end of the Ridge can he 
see them? 

Director: No; it is almost 1,000 yards to the Pike and the trees along 
the creek, rolls of the ground, etc., hide your view of the Pike. 

Sgt. Ely: Then I do not suppose they can see me? 

Director: You do not know. Go ahead with your movements. I will 
tell you when you can see anything. 

Sgt. Ely: I continue on the railroad trestle over the creek. 

Director: What are your intentions? You see the creek is swift, 5 feet 
deep and 60 feet wide. 

Sgt. Ely: I intend to follow up the west bank of the creek for the 
present. 

Director-' The Reds may retire. 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 157 

(The director must now determine just where the Red patrol will be 
when the Blues reach the top of Sandy Ridge. Taking into considera- 
tion the character of ground over which the patrols have moved, their 
surroundings, etc., the director decides that the leading Blue reaches the 
crest of Hill- 66 at 11:18, and that the Reds reach the trestle at 11:16. 
Sergeant Adams will reach the top of the hill about 11 :20, when the Reds 
will have crossed the trestle. Removing the Red pin and placing a Blue 
pin on the northern crest of Hill 66, he has the Blues called to the map.) 
Director: Corporal Baker, remain at the map; Sergeant Adams, step 
back out of hearing with your other assistants. Corporal Baker, you 
reach the top of the Ridge here without any resistance. What do you do? 
Corporal Baker: I lie down. 
Director: Where do you look? 

Corporal Baker: I look along the hill down in the valley toward the 
Maxey house, toward Hill 42, and towards Salem. 

Director: All the Blues, please step to the map. Sergeant Adams, 
Baker reaches the top of the hill and pauses to look over the country, 
lying down. 
Sgt. Adams: I signal "Halt" to the other men and wait for his signal. 
Director: He makes no signal. 

Sgt. Adams: I continue up the hill, halt the other men in rear of the 
crest and lie down beside Baker, examining the country. 
Director-' You see nothing suspicious. 
Sgt. Adams: What time is it? 
Director: It is 11:22. 

Sgt. Adams: There is no sign of any large detachment of Reds as far 
south as Salem and I do not know where the hostile patrol has gone. 
They may be hiding in the woods at the northern end of this Ridge or 
near the Maxey house, or they may have fallen back behind the south end 
of this hill or Hill 42. I would gain nothing by an encounter with them 
now, and would risk being surprised, as they are probably watching our 
movements now. It would be dangerous to venture into the valley east 
of Sandy Ridge and I have already seen that no large force of Reds is 
nearby. I cannot risk remaining here, therefore, I decide to retire to the 
steel bridge and work north under cover of the timber along the west 
bank of Sandy Creek. I will order Baker to remain on this hill until we 
reach the bridge when he will run down the hill and follow as rear guard, 
at 75 yards. 



158 CHAPTER VI. 

Director: That will do for the Blues. You may retire. Call the Reds to 
the map. (He removes the Blue pin and places a Red at the northern 
end of the railroad trestle.) Sergeant Ely, you reach this point and have 
seen nothing of the enemy. 

Sgt. Ely-' I will follow the creek north until we are opposite the south- 
ern end of the orchard at the Brown house, and if I have seen nothing 1 
will return to this trestle, cross the creek and go to Bald Knob and re- 
turn to the battalion. 

Director: The Reds may retire. 

(Seeing that there can be no contact between the patrols for some time, 
the director now calculates when the Blues will reach the trestle. (Left 
Hill 66 at 11:25 -f 42 = 12:07) and when the Reds will return to the 
same point (left trestle 11:18 -j- 50 = 12:08). In making these calcula- 
tions the character of the ground covered, probable delays, etc., are con- 
sidered. The director now sees that the Blues will arrive first, but if the 
Reds have a flanker on the railroad fill, he will see the Blues before they 
reach the trestle and, having the advantage of the railroad embankment, 
the Reds should be able to drive the Blues back, at least temporarily. He 
places a Red pin on the Creek bank, opposite the orchard.) 

Director: Call the Reds to the map. (The Reds enter.) Sergeant Ely. 
you go down the creek to this point and see nothing of the enemy. 

Sgt. Ely-' I would then return to the trestle at once and go to Bald 
Knob to get a view of the country towards Boling. 

Director: Explain the arrangement of your men as you go. 

Sgt. Ely: I would be about 50 yards in advance of Hay; Gray would be 
75 yards on Hay's right flank and the third man would follow at 50 yards. 
When we reached the northern end of the railroad fill I would tell Gray 
to walk along it. On crossing the 

Director (Interrupting) : All step back from the map except Corporal 
Gray. Corporal, when you are walking along the fill about 300 yards 
from the trestle you suddenly see a Blue dismounted man walking towards 
you from the south here. (Places a Blue pin on the map about 75 yards 
south of the trestle and a Red pin to mark Gray's position.) What do 
you do? 

Corporal Gray: I lie down and open fire on him 

Director: Sgt. Ely and and Corporal Hay may return to the map. Ser- 
geant, when you are walking along about 250 yards from the trestle, be- 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 159 

tween the creek and the fill, Gray suddenly lies down here and opens fire 
in this direction (indicating). 

Sgt. Ely- I wave to the other two men to follow me and run forward 
and up on the fill. What do I see? 

Director: You see one Blue man running back here. (Places a Blue 
pin about 150 yards south of the point the trestle crosses the creek.) You 
also see two other men running towards him. 

Sgt. Ely: I open fire rapidly and as soon as the other two men reach 
me I order them to rush across the creek on the trestle and open fire from 
that side. Under cover of their fire I hope to get Gray and myself across. 

Director: The Reds may retire. Call the Blues to the map. (He re- 
moves the pins and the Blues enter.) Sergeant Adams, how are your 
men arranged in moving up the creek? 

Sgt. Adams: Baker is 150 yards in advance, I follow with Carter, and 
Davis is 75 yards in rear. 

Director: When Corporal Baker reaches this point (places Blue pin 
about 75 yards south of the trestle and a Red pin at the point where Gray 
fired from), he is suddenly fired on by one man from this point on the 
fill. There being no cover nearby he runs back toward you and a second 
man opens fire from the fill at this point. (Places Red pin on the fill 
about 150 yards south of Gray's position.) What do you do? 

(Sergeant Adams takes some time to decide.) 

Director: While you are deciding two men rush across the trestle and 
open fire from the fill on east side of the creek here (places Red pin). 
One of your men is wounded in the arm and your position is so exposed 
that your men run back in the hayfield and take cover. 

Sgt. Adams-' I would join them and order them to crawl towards the 
Chester Pike. I see no advantage to be gained by fighting here, and we 
can see almost as well from a safer point nearer the road. 

Director: Call the Reds to the map. The Blues may remain here as 
we will now play the game open. (The Reds enter.) Sgt. Ely, the two 
men are safely across the trestle and open fire from the fill. The Blues 
seem to be withdrawing under cover of the short hay, towards the Ches- 
ter Pike. You have counted four men. Tell me what you now do, with- 
out giving the other side any information as to how many men you have. 

Sgt. Ely-' I would complete my movement to the east bank of the creek 
and for the present remain watching the Blues' movement. 

Director: Sergeant Adams, what are your intentions? 

Sgt. Adams: What time is it? 



160 CHAPTER VI. 

Director: 12:15. 

Sgt. Adams: I will send the wounded man back in care of another man, 
with a message, and remain near the Mason farm until 1 :15 P. M., and 
then return. 

Director: The maneuver has been sufficiently developed, so we will 
terminate it here. I will now read the Red and Blue situations. 

The director reads aloud both situations, briefly gives each commander's 
estimate of the situation and their orders. He then rapidly describes the 
movements of the two patrols, explaining their relative positions and in- 
tentions at the several critical points in the maneuver, up to the time the 
maneuver was terminated. He then makes the following observations on 
the movements : 

Both commanders had a correct conception of their missions. The 
Blues were both to seek information and prevent the enemy from obtain- 
ing any. The Reds were after information alone, and only fought to pre- 
vent themselves from being cut off. In going from Hill 62 to the Mason 
house, I think the Blues could have taken a better route, not going out 
into the open on the ridge south of Hill 62, but by keeping within the 
edge of the woods, observing the valley from there and utilizing the 
woods to cover their descent into the valley. Sandy Ridge was their 
proper objective as it commands a comprehensive view of the valley in 
every direction. The same applies to the Red patrol. If they had fol- 
lowed the road to Boling they could not have observed the Chester Pike, 
and from the Chester Pike the Boling road would have been unobserved. 

The disposition of the members of the Blue patrol appeared proper ; 
but I think all distances were too short in the case of the Reds and they 
might have resulted in disaster. 

Sergeant Adams was confronted by a trying situation when he was 
sighted by the Red patrol. His quickly reached decision to go ahead and 
ascend Sandy Ridge was exceedingly risky, but was far better than a 
more hesitating procedure resulting in a long wait near Mason's and noth- 
ing definite accomplished. Possibly it involved too great a risk to be jus- 
tified, but it is better to err on the side of too great a determination to go 
ahead and carry out your plan, than to halt, wait and accomplish nothing. 
He should have sent a message telling of the presence of the Reds in 
that section. 

The decision of Sergeant Ely to continue north after sighting the Blues 
was excellent, but he should have given some specific orders to watch the 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 161 

Blues after he had crossed over the Ridge and to notice whether they ob- 
served his patrol. A flanker could have followed just in rear of the crest 
of the northern nose of the Ridge to the woods at its foot, and would 
have seen the Blues halt and then resume their march south. Knowing 
this, the Red patrol should not have risked following the railroad across 
the open fields and crossed to the western bank of Sandy Creek. Further- 
more, the Red patrol could not hope to see much by following the creek 
bank and only going as far as the Brown's orchard. Unless the intention 
had been to go to Hill 62, Long Ridge, or around the farm lane to the 
bridge over Sandy Creek south of Boling, it does not seem that the move 
from the railroad trestle to the orchard was the best move under the cir- 
cumstances. Corporal Fry's delivery of his message showed that he should 
have been ordered to repeat it before leaving. The message was incom- 
plete in that it did not tell what Sergeant Ely next intended to do. 

Sergeant Adams' move in returning from Sandy Ridge appears proper, 
but he was not quick enough in realizing his situation at the trestle when 
fired upon. Decisions at such a moment must be made instantly, whether 
right or wrong. The formation of his patrol was good; the distances be- 
ing sufficiently great, which saved him from a heavy loss. Sergeant Ely 
showed good judgment in his rapid action to get his patrol across the 
creek. While he might readily have guessed that this was the same Blue 
patrol of three or four men he had already seen, yet he had no particular 
reason for inviting a fight, and he was in a dangerous position while west 
of Sandy Creek. 

Are there any remarks on the maneuver? 

(A general discussion is thus invited and the session completed.) 

Notes. 
Blue. Red. 



Start. 


10-10 A. 


M. 


Salem. 


10-00 A. M 


Hill 62— 


-20 




Hill 68— 


-30 


Leave Hill 62 


-25 




Hill 66— 


-45 


Orchard — • 


-35 




Message 


-45 


See Reds 


-44 




r. r. x — 


-55 


Hill 66 


11-18 




Trestle 


11-16 


Leave Hill 66 


^25 




Return trestle 


12-08 


Trestle 


12-07 









• 



153. Remarks. In maneuvers where only individuals or groups of 
two or three men are together, the pins are usually used without any 



162 CHAPTER VI. 

cardboard troop signs, though the circular disk may be put on the pin. 
This would have to be done to indicate cavalry or infantry. 

Should a player wish to write a message, the director allows him to 
.write it when he has retired from the map, but he cautions him not to 
show it to the party it is intended for, and to bring it in when he returns 
to the map. The director gives it to the party it is addressed to when 
that person reaches the point in the maneuver the director considers he 
would actually have reached before he could have received the message. 

Whenever players are supposed to be separated from each other, on the 
map, so that they could not communicate verbally, the director should 
have them at the map separately to make their decisions, and should cau- 
tion them not to tell each other what is occurring in their vicinity. 

The difficulty of directing increases rapidly with each additional player 
and it is also frequently difficult to give interesting work to every player. 
For this reason, care should be taken to avoid assigning a large number 
of players to a side. In the foregoing example of a map maneuver 
worked out in detail, two players on a side would have been the best ar- 
rangement for the average director and for the instruction of the players. 

Situations for Map Maneuvers. 

(•a) Cavalry. 

Blue Situation: On July 1st a Blue contact troop of cavalry from the 
west, halts in Oxford at 10 A. M., and Sergeant A receives the following 
orders from his Captain: "We have no information of the enemy's pres- 
ence in this vicinity. The troop will remain here for the night. Take the 
first six men from the First Platoon and reconnoiter as far south as Sa- 
lem, returning before dusk. I am sending a small patrol to York." The 
day is cool, the roads hard macadam, and the country friendly. 

Required: Sergeant A's estimate of the situation and his orders for the 
start. 

Red Situation: On July 1st a Red contact troop of cavalry halts in 
York at 10 A. M., and Sergeant B receives the following orders from his 
Captain : 

"Small Red cavalry detachments are reported to have been operating 
along the railroad as far south as Salem. The troop will camp here for 
tonight. Take this first platoon (15 men), move out the County Road, 
and examine the railroad line between Salem and Oxford, to determine 
if the track or bridges have been injured. The inhabitants in this section 



THE WAR GAME OR MAP MANEUVERS. 163 

are very hostile and not to be trusted." The day is cool, and the roads 
are hard macadam. 

Required: Sergeant B's estimate of the situation and his orders for the 
start. 

One or two players can be used on the Blue side and from two to four 
on the Red side. The roads are assumed to be hard macadam, which 
should be used to teach the men something about the care of their mounts. 
The Blues' mission requires reconnaissance only. The size of the Red 
patrol should cause the Blue leader considerable trouble in deciding 
whether or not it is part of a larger advancing force, and he should also 
have considerable difficulty in determining what the Red patrol is trying 
to do. The Red leader will be constantly confronted with a desire to 
separate his command to a dangerous degree, 
(b) Infantry. 

Blue Situation: One squad of Co. A, 1st Blue Infantry at Oxford is 
ordered, at 7 A. M., to take two escort wagons, proceed to Nixon's store, 
and seize a large amount of oats reported to be stored there, and carry 
it back to Oxford. The country is hostile and the nearest Reds are 
thought to be 10 miles south of York. 

Required: Corporal A's estimate of the situation and his orders. 

Red Situation: Co. A, 1st Red Infantry, from the south, halts at the 
Maxey farm at 7 A. M., and Corporal A receives the following orders: 
"Blue troops are reported to have occupied Oxford. Take your squad 
and reconnoiter the valley of Sandy Creek and the country to the west 
of that range of hills (points towards Lone Hill). Reassure the farm- 
ers, telling them they will be given protection against the enemy's depre- 
dations. The company will remain here today. Return by dusk." The 
country is friendly. 

Required: Corporal A's estimate of the situation and his orders. 

There should be about three players on a side in this maneuver. The 
director should require some time for the loading of the wagons at Nix- 
on's store. The Blue leader should make careful provisions for the safety 
of his squad while loading, by scouts on the high ground to the south 
and east. 

(c) Infantry-Cavalry. 

Blue Situation: The 1st Bn. 1st Blue Infantry camps on the bank of the 
stream just west of Boling at noon and Sergeant A receives the following 
orders from his captain : "Nothing has been heard of any Red troops in 
this neighborhood. The battalion will camp here for the night. Our 



164 CHAPTER VI. 

company will form *the outpost and you will take the 1st platoon (4 
squads) and take position as Support No. 1, at the road forks by the 
Morey farm. The 2d platoon as Support No. 2 will be at the bridge over 
Sandy Creek, on the road due south from Boling. You will have charge 
of the section from the eastern edge of the Boling Woods to Long Ridge, 
and will hold your position in case of attack. There will be no reserve. 
Messages should be sent to Battalion Headquarters. I will visit Support 
No. 2 first." 

Required: Sergeant A's estimate of the situation, his orders and a 
sketch of his dispositions. 

Red Situation: Troop A, 1st Red Cavalry, halts in Oxford at noon and 
Sergeant A receives the following orders : "The Blues are reported to be 
moving south from Chester. The troop will camp here for the night. 
Take six men and reconnoiter towards Chester by the Chester Pike and 
find out whether any large detachments of the enemy have moved south. 
Return by dusk." 

The country is hostile. 

Required: Sergeant A's estimate of the situation and his orders. 

The director should arrange to have the Blue company commander ab- 
sent at Support No. 2 or at Battalion Headquarters when the Red cavalry 
is sighted. The Red situation can be used for an infantry patrol by hav- 
ing a Red company halt at Nixon's store or at the County Road-Chester 
Pike* crossroads. 

Note: To those who wish to go more extensively into the subject of 
map maneuvers, the author would recommend, "Map Maneuvers," by 
Capt. Sayre. The book can be obtained from the Secretary, Army Serv- 
ice Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kans. (Book, 45 cts. ; one war game set, 
50 cts.; one 12-inch map, $1.25.) 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 165 



CHAPTER VII. 
MILITARY SKETCHING. 

(While this chapter presents the principal features of military sketching in a 
simple, clear manner, attention is invited to the fact that the only way that any one 
who has never done any sketching can follow properly the statements made, is to 
do so with the instruments and the sketching material mentioned at hand. In fact, 
the only way to learn how to sketch is to sketch.) 

A Military Sketch, is a rough map showing the features of the 
ground that are of military value. 

Military Sketching is the art of making such a military sketch. 
Military Sketches are of three kinds: 
Position Sketches, Fig. 1; 
Outpost Sketches; 
Road Sketches. 
All kinds of military sketches are intended to give a military commander 
detailed information of the ground to be operated over, when this is not 
given by the existing maps, or when there are no maps of the area. 
The general methods of sketching are: 

(1) The location of points by intersection. 

(2) The location of points by traversing. 

(3) The determination of the heights of hills, shapes of the ground, 
etc., by contours. 

(1) To locate a point by intersection proceed as follows: Set up, level 
and orient the board, Fig. 4, p. 168, (or Sketching Case, Fig. 3, p. 167), at 
A, Fig. 1. The board is said to be oriented when the needle is parellel to 
the lines across the face of the compass, Fig. 3, of the cavalry case, or 
parallel to the sides of the compass trough of the drawing board, Fig. 4. 
(At every station the needle must have this position, so that every line on 
the sketch will be parallel to the corresponding line or direction on the 
ground.) Assume a point (A) on the paper, Fig. 1 Y, in such a position that 
the ground to be sketched will fall on the sheet. Lay the ruler on the board 
and point it to the desired point (C), all the while keeping the edge of 
the ruler on the point (A), Fig. 1 Y. Draw an indefinite line along the 



166 



f 



CHAPTER VII. 

Figure 1. 



Groa,^£ 



/■*-. 


;r 


4 - 


. ,*\ 


/ 


•^ N 


/ i/ 


•v. N 


/ 


^ \ 


/ / 


".a 


, / 




/ 




/ 


MAP 


£"v 




V 








N 






^ 




\ i 




"s 








^ 1 








^.!C 




A(890) 



(Note: This diagram represents 
the sketching board.) 



Fig.l 



vr- 



edge. Now move to (B), Fig. 1 X, plotted on the map in (b), Fig. 1 X, 
and having set up, leveled and oriented as at (A), Fig. 1 Y, sight toward 
(C) as before. The intersection (crossing) of the two lines locates (C) 
on the sketch at (c), Fig. 1 X. 

(2) To locate a point by traversing is done as follows: With the board 
set up, leveled and oriented at A, Fig. 1 Y, as above, draw a line in the 
direction of the desired point B, Fig. 1 X, and then move to B, counting 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 



167 



strides, keeping record of them with a tally register, Fig. 5, if one is avail- 
able. Set up the board at B, Fig. 1 X, and orient it by laying the ruler 
along the line (a) -(b), Fig. 1 X, and moving the board until the ruler is 
directed toward A, Fig. 1 Y, on the ground; or else orient by the needle 




(Sketching Case) — Figure 3. 



168 



CHAPTER VII. 



as at A. With the scale of the sketcher's strides on the ruler, Fig. 3, lay 
off the number of strides found from A, Fig. 1 Y, to B, Fig. 1 X, and 
mark the point (b), Fig. 1 X. Other points, such as C, D, etc., would be 
located in the same way. 




(Drawing Board) 



(3) To draw in contours on a sketch, the following steps are necessary: 
(a) From the known or assumed elevation of a located station as A, 

Fig. 1 Y, (elevation 890), the elevations of all hill tops, stream junctures, 

stream sources, etc., are determined. 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 169 

(b) Having found the elevations of these critical points the contours 
are put in by spacing them so as to show the slope of the ground along 
each line such as (a) -(b), (a) -(c), etc., Fig. 1 Y, as these slopes actually 
are on the ground. 

To find the elevation of any point, say C (shown on sketch as c), pro- 
ceed as follows : 





(Tally Register) — Figure 5. (Clinometer) — Figure 6. 

Read the vertical angle with slope board, Fig. 4, or with a clinometer, 
Fig. 6. Suppose this is found to be 2 degrees; lay the scale of M. D.* 
(ruler, Fig. 4) along (a) -(c), Fig. 1 Y, and note the number of divisions 
of — 2 degrees (minus 2°) between (a) and (c). Suppose there are found 
to be §y 2 divisions; then, since each division is 10 feet, the total height of 
A above C is 55 feet (5 l / 2 X 10). C is therefore 835 ft. elev. which is 
written at (c), Fig. 1 Y. Now looking at the ground along A-C, suppose 
you find it to be a very decided concave (hollowed out) slope, nearly flat 
at the bottom and steep at the top. There are to be placed in this space 
(a) -(c), Fig. 1 Y, contours 890, 880, 870, 860 and 850, and they would 
be spaced close at the top and far apart near (c), Fig. 1 Y, to give a true 
idea of the slope. 

The above is the entire principle of contouring in making sketches and 
if thoroughly learned by careful repetition under different conditions, will 
enable the student to soon be able to carry the contours with the hori- 
zontal locations. 



*The construction of a scale of M. D.'s is described under map reading, par. 28, 
page 18). Scales of M. D.'s can be obtained from the Secretary, Army Service 
School, Fort Leavenworth, Kans. 



170 CHAPTER VII. 

Position Sketching-. 

Instruments used in Position and Outpost sketching : 

1. Drawing board with attached compass, Fig. 4. 

2. Loose ruler (on board, Fig. 3 and 4). 

3. Rough tripod or camera tripod. 

4. Scale of M.D.'s (shown on ruler, Fig. 4). 

5. Scale of the sketcher's strides (at 6" to 1 mile), shown on ruler, Fig. 3. 

6. Clinometer (not absolutely necessary if board has slope board), Fig. 6. 

7. Scale of hundreds of yards (shown on ruler, Fig. 3). 
Methods to be used : 

1. Select a Base Line, that is, a central line J /[ to l / 2 mile long in the 
area to be sketched. The base should have at its end some plainly marked 
objects,. such as telegraph poles, trees, corners of buildings, etc., and from 
its ends a good view of the area should be possible. 

2. Set up, level and orient the drawing boad at one end of the base 
(A), Fig. 1 Y. Draw a meridian on the sheet parallel to the position of 
the magnetic needle. 

Assume a point (A), Fig. 1 Y, corresponding to the ground point (A), 
890, on the sheet in such a position that the area to be sketched will lie on 
the sheet. 

3. Sight at hill tops, stream junctures, stream heads, etc., to begin the 
location of these points by intersection. (See "To locate a point by in- 
tersection" page .) 

4. Traverse to B and complete the locations by intersection as previ- 
ously explained. (See "To locate a point by traversing;' page .) 

5. Draw the details of country between A and B and in the vicinity of 
this line, using the conventional signs for roads, houses, etc. 

6. The lines from station (b), Fig. 1 X, to any of the other located 
points may now be used as a new base line to carry the work over ad- 
ditional area. 

7. In case parts of the area are not visible from a base line, these parts 
are located by traversing as before explained. 

8. Having learned by several repetitions the above steps, the sketcher 
will then combine contouring (see contouring above) with his horizontal 
locations. 

Outpost Sketching. 

The methods of Outpost Sketching are the same as for position sketch- 
ing, except that the sketcher can not advance toward the supposed posi- 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 



171 



tion of the enemy beyond the outpost line. Therefore a base line must be 
selected on or in rear of the line of observation. From this base line all 
points visible toward the enemy are located by intersection or by traverse 
along the base line, details being shown by conventional signs and con- 
tours as for the position sketch. 

Road Sketching. 
Instruments used : 

1. Drawing board or sketching case. 

2. Loose ruler. 

3. Scales of strides, if made dismounted; scale of time, trotting or 
walking, if mounted. 

4. Scale of hundreds of yards, at 3" to 1 mile. 

5. Scale of M. D. 

6. Clinometer (if slope board not available). 

K 




Figure 7. 

Methods : 

1. At station 1, Fig. 7, orient the board as described under "To locate 
a point by intersection" page , holding the board in the hands in front 
of the body of the sketcher who faces toward station 2. 

2. Important points in the vicinity, such as the railroad bridge, the 
stream juncture, hill tops, are sighted for intersections, lines drawn as 
shown and the sketcher traverses (as under traverse above) to station 2. 



172 CHAPTER VII. 

3. At station 2, he locates and draws in all details between station 1 
and 2 to include about 300 yards on each side of the road (described 
under "Position Sketching," page 170). 

4. The traverse is then continued forward as described for 1 and 2. 

5. After some practice in horizontal sketching, as just described, the 
sketcher will be able to take up contouring in combination. The methods 
are as described in paragraph on contouring. 

6. Method to follow when the traverse runs off the paper as at A, Fig. 
7 ; re-orient the board so that the road forward will lie across the long 
dimensions of the paper; draw a meridian parallel to the compass needle 
and assume a point on the new sheet corresponding to the last point (A) 
plotted on the first sheet. 

7. On completion of the sketch the various sections will be pasted to- 
gether, so that all the meridians are parallel. 

Construction of Working Scales. — The construction of scales has al- 
ready been explained under Map Reading in Par. 24, page 14. To make 
a working scale (one that is used by the person making a sketch), con- 
struct a scale of convenient length, about 6 inches, as described in Par. 
24, to read in the units you intend to measure your distances with (your 
stride, pace, stride of a horse, etc.), to the scale on which you intend to 
make your sketch. 

For example, suppose your stride is 66 inches long (33-inch pace) and 

you wish to make a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = 1 mile. The R. F. of 

3 inches 3 inches 1 m , 

this scale is : — = = . That is 1 inch on your 

1 mile 63360 inches 21120 

sketch is to represent 21,120 inches on the ground. As you intend to 

measure your ground distances by counting your strides of 66 inches 

length ; 1 inch on the sketch will represent as many of your strides on the 

ground as 66 is contained into 21,120 = 320 strides. For convenience in 

sketching you wish to make your scale about 6 inches long. Since 1 inch 

represents 320 strides, 6 inches will represent 6 X 320 = 1,920 strides. 

As this is an odd number, difficult to divide into convenient subdivisions 

of hundreds, fifties, etc., construct your scale to represent 2,000 strides, 

which will give it a length slightly in excess of 6 inches — 6.25. Lay off 

this length and divide it into ten main divisions of 200 strides each, and 

subdivide these into 50 stride divisions, as explained in Par. 24, page 14.* 



*Sheets of working scales reading in paces, strides, minutes, etc., at a scale of 3 
and 6 inches to the mile, can be obtained at little cost from the Secretary, Army 
Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas. 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 
Conventional Signs Usually Used in Sketching. 



173 



The following are the conventional signs and abbreviations used in 
military sketching, that are authorized by the Field Service Regulations: 



The following abbreviations are authorized for use on field maps and sketches. 
When these words are used they must be written in full or abbreviated as shown. Tbf 
abbreviations must not be used for words other than those in the table. Words notin 
the table are not as a pule abbreviated. 



abut 


.abutment 
blacksmith shop 


PO. 
Pt 


post Office 
point 


bot. 

Cr 

cul 


bottom 
creek 
culvert 


q.p. 
R 


quarry 
queen post 
river 


Cult. 


cultivated 


RH 


round house 


d 


deep 


RR. 


railroad 


F_ 


east 


S. 


3outh 


f 


fordable 


s. 


steel 


gin 


girder 


SH 


school house 


CM 


gnat mill 


5.M. 


saw mill 


i 


iron 


Sta.. 


station 


I 


island 


St 


stone 


kp. 

L. 


junction 

king-post 

lake 


str 

tres 

Xr 


stream 
trestle 
truss 


Mt. 


mountain 


W.T 


water tank 


N 


north 


WW 


water works 


n.f 


not fordable 


W 


west 


P 


pier 


wd. 


wide 


pk 


plank 


rv 


wood 



Telegraph tttttttttttt 

[Smgle track ' 

Rsulroacte ^Double track mimmmui iM i ii ii mniii im 

[ Improved - — 

Roads J.Unimproved -===-^-=------==-~===- 

[Trail ~ ----- 

barbed wire ■« - — > — ». ■ « ■ — * — — — ■ — ■ — 

smooth wire — — » « ■« — « — > — ■ — ■ — « — •— 

Fences J wood 

stone u w . i«' wjtr" " i»i . 

hedge «©t»<5s»»«»<3»fl&BS 



174 



CHAPTER VII. 



Bridge 



Indicate character and span by abbreviations. 



Example. 



■w.kp. 



40x20 
10 



Meaning wooden kingpost bndge,40feet long, 20 feet wide, 
and 10 feet above the water 



Streams 



Indicate character by abbreviations. 
Example: ~ > *-v45*£, *g n/r 

Meaning a stream 15 feet wide, 8 feet deep, and not fbrdaWe. 
House • Church* School house -&H 

Cultivated Land lCultl 
If boundary lines are fences they are indicated as such 
Brush , crops or grass , important as cover or forage 
Cemetery | +♦ % *+| Trees, isolated 

cut 10 feet deep 
fill 10 feet high 



Woods t^^sj Orchards irril 



Bruah.com, 
frass.cte. 



Cut and fill - 



♦■ ♦ + 

* *■ * 








, Cut 






* W 
. Fill 







to 1 



For more elaborate map work the authorized conventional signs are used 



MILITARY SKETCHING. 175 

Points for Beginners to Remember. 

1. Always keep your pencils sharpened and have an eraser handy. No 
one but an expert can sketch with a dull pencil. 

2. Use hard pencils when learning to sketch — 4H to 6H — and go over 
your work afterwards with a softer pencil — 2H. 

3. Do not try to put down on your sketch a mass of small details that are 
too small to be shown on the scale at which you are sketching. For ex- 
ample, if you are making a sketch on a scale of 3 inches = 1 mile, do not 
try to show each house in a row of houses ; simply indicate that there is 
a row of houses by putting down several distinct conventional signs for 
houses, in a row; nor should you try to show every little "cut" through 
which the road may run. Only use about one sign to the inch for tele- 
graph or telephone lines, for wire fences, etc. 

4. When first practicing sketching only plot the route over which you 
walk, indicating it by a single line. When you can do this with facility, 
go back over one of these plotted routes and fill in the woods, houses, 
streams and the other large features. 

5. The beginner should sketch the same ground several times over — at 
least three or four times. Practice alone will make perfect. 

6. Always try to compare your finished sketch with an accurate map of 
the ground, if one is obtainable. Try to practice on ground of which you* 
can obtain a map. 

7. Make each course (the distance you go between points where the 
direction of your route changes) as long as possible. 

8. Do not try to contour until you are expert at making a sketch show- 
ing all the Hat details (roads, streams, woods, houses, etc.). 

9. Never try to "sketch in" the contours until you have plotted the 
stream lines or the direction of the valleys, ravines, etc. The contours 
are fitted to or sketched around the drainage system ; not the drainage 
system to the contours. 

10. Always "size up" ground before you sketch it; that is, take a gen- 
eral view of it, noticing the drainage system (the direction in which the 
streams flow or ravines run), the prominent hills and ridges, the direc- 
tion the roads run, etc. 



176 

OTHER BOOKS BY THE SAME AUTHOR. 

Any of the books named can be gotten from : 
The U. S. Infantry Association, Washington, D. C. 
The U. S. Cavalry Association, Fort Leavenworth, Kans. 
The Post Exchange, Fort Wm. McKinley, P. I. 

OFFICERS' MANUAL. 5th Edition, Revised and Enlarged. (Con- 
sists of Manual proper and Supplement.) Price, $2.50, postpaid. The 
first book of its kind ever published, being a handy, convenient compila- 
tion of "Customs of the Service" and other matters of a practical, worth- 
knowing nature. Partial Table of Contents : 

Suggestions to Officers Just Appointed; How to Succeed in The 
Army; The Organization of The Army; The Militia of the United 
States; Relation of the Military to the Civil; The Post Adjutant; 
The Post Quartermaster ; The Post Commissary ; The Post Recruit- 
ing Officer; The Post Exchange Officer; The Post Prison Officer; 
Artillery District and Post Ordnance Officers ; The Post Engineer 
Officer; The Post Signal Officer; The Company; Paper-Work in the 
Army; Discipline; Aides-de-Camp ; Post Administration; "Customs 
of the Service ;" Field Service ; The Post Athletic Officer ; The Post 
Range Officer ; Officer in Command of the Machine Gun Platoon ; 
The Summary Court; Inspector of Small-Arms Practice; The Sur- 
veying Officer ; Military Attaches ; The Educational System of the 
Army; Professional Study; Esprit de Corps; Employment of the 
Regular Army in Peace and War; The Use of the Army for Relief 
Purposes in Public Catastrophes ; Riot Duty ; Appointment, Promo- 
tion and Retirement of Officers ; Model Proceedings of Boards, Model 
Forms of Depositions, etc. 

NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS' MANUAL. Price, $1.50, post- 
paid. A liberal discount on lots of ten or more copies. The SOUL 
of this book consists of the condensed and collated experiences of over 
fifty (50) old and experienced noncommissioned officers. Partial Table 
of Contents: The Importance of the Position of Noncommissioned Of- 
ficer ; Discipline ; The Usual Duties of All Noncommissioned Officers ; 
Paper- Work; Military Courtesy; Military Deportment and Appearance; 
Forms of Speech; Guard Duty; Security and Information; Field Serv- 
ice; Rifle Trenches; Care of Health and First Aid to the Sick and 
Wounded; Military Map Reading; Military Sketching; "Customs of the 
Service." 

PRIVATES' MANUAL. Price, 50 cents, postpaid. A liberal dis- 
count on lots of ten or more copies. Partial Table of Contents : Military 



177 

Courtesy ; Military Deportment and Appearance ; Care of Clothing, Arms 
and Equipment ; Forms of Speech ; Guard Duty ; Care of the Health and 
First Aid to Sick and Injured; Field Service and Individual Cooking; 
The Use, Description and Management of the Rifle. 

FIELD SERVICE. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Price, 
$1.25, postpaid. This book treats in a simple, practical and concrete man- 
ner the important subject of FIELD SERVICE. It gives the result of 
the experiences of a number of officers and enlisted men. Partial Table 
of Contents: 

Equipment and Personal Effects of Officers ; Equipment and Per- 
sonal Effects of Enlisted Men ; A Company Taking the Field, Things 
to be Taken Along; Loading Wagons; Transportation and Caring for 
Means of Transportation ; General Rules for the Conduct of Marches 
— Advance Guards — Rear Guards — Flanking Parties; Camping — 
Forms and Dimensions of Camps — Their Location — Construction of 
Sinks, Kitchens, Kitchen Pits and Incineration Pits; Camp Expedi- 
ents; Individual Cooking; Field Cooking; Field Baking and Field 
Bakery Equipment ; Care of the Health and First Aid to the Sick and 
Wounded; Rifle Trenches; Weights of Articles Usually Taken into 
the Field — Weights, Dimensions and Capacity of Tents — Heating 
Tents — Weights of Rations — Capacities of Wagons and Pack Ani- 
mals — Dimensions and Capacities of Railroad Cars — Allowance of 
Water — Ration of Forage. 

RIOT DUTY. 50 cents, postpaid. A liberal discount on quantity. 
Partial Table of Contents: 

The Legal Side: When the Regular Army and when the Militia 
May be ordered out for Riot Duty; Civil Control of Troops — The 
Seizure, Use, and Destruction of Private Property— Firing on Riot- 
ers — Arresting Rioters in Private Houses — Disposition of Persons 
Arrested — Arrest of Officers and Enlisted Men While on Riot Duty — 
Writ of Habeas Corpus, etc., etc. 

The Tactical Side: Assembling of Militia Organizations — Leaving 
the Armory — Marching to the Scene of Trouble — Dispersing or At- 
tacking a Mob — Attack and Defense of Houses and Barricades — De- 
fense of Railway Stations, Freight Depots, Rolling Stock and Tracks, 
etc., etc. 

THE MOSS-DALTON COMPANY RECORDS. (Adapted to the 
use of organizations of all arms.) Designed by Captain James A. 
Moss, 24th U. S. Infantry, and Captain Harry F. Dalton, Quartermaster's 
Department. 

A set of modern up-to-date books embodying advanced ideas in record 
keeping. 

They reduce the weight, bulk and work by over 75 per cent. 



178 

The Set. 

(All of uniform size, AV 2 x 8*4 inches.) 

1. Delinquency Record. 5. Individual Responsibility of en- 

2. Muster and Pay Roll Data. listed men. 

3. Council Book. 6. Property Responsibility of organ- 

4. Record of Clothing Inspection. ization commander. 

(Total weight, 2 l / 2 lbs.; bulk, 93 cubic inches.) 
There is also supplied a Property Book for Post Quartermasters 

Prices. 

Individual books, $1.00; per set (6), with 75 leaves per book, $4.80; 
extra leaves, 75 cents per hundred ; individual covers with rings, 60 cents 
per set, and perforator, 50 cents (for those who wish to keep Descriptive 
Lists, Summary Court Records and other records in Moss-Dalton covers). 



H I 



F ORT LEAVEXWO RT H .KAS. 

and 

VICINITY 

COMMAND AM 



X N O 




B 



tyiitf) 



\t 



3 - 




5-3 






H 






u>°- 


K 




P5 


K> 


P 


■£ | 


O 






3$ 


K 



jnOL) idd S8|iui g[ 
ajnujH J9d spje^ Ofrfr-doiieg-jaguassaw pajuno^ 



0829/1 J y '^ L 0}U|2L 

savoy aooo no sdooyi HS3yj 

H38VW JO S3inNIW 30 S31V3S 



Cavalry and F A-Trot - 220 Yards per Minute 
7 1/2 miles per hour 



T. 



37 



o - 

e £ 



y 



3: 



ZF 



M 



"mi;g.T,T7r"7"r" 

3! y g -| -A-aDUEJSia dew 



"^ 





h. 


° * 


P3 


3 O 


t> 



spA ot7 
AuedwoQ 




spjeA 012 

uieji jequuoQ q;iM 

uo!|E)}ea 



=r~" 




Scale of Yards Scale 12 inches to 1 mile 



440 Yards - 1/4 mile 
Infantry quick time 

(including halts) 5 1/2 min. 
not halted 5 
double time 3 » 

Mounted Messenger 1 

12 3 4 

1 I H F 



440 Yards -1/4 mile 

Cavalry or F. A. • Walk 4 min 

walk & trot 3 •• 

trot 2 » 

gallop 1-1/3 - 

charging 2/5 « 

5 6 7 8 



1000 




Wtlif) 



f- 



ELEMENTARY TvTAF» 




